Cosy Winter Recipes - ProperFoodie https://properfoodie.com/winter-recipes/ Nutritious and full flavoured recipes Mon, 28 Feb 2022 23:54:15 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.4 https://properfoodie.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/square-logo-96x96.png Cosy Winter Recipes - ProperFoodie https://properfoodie.com/winter-recipes/ 32 32 Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/#respond Sat, 06 Feb 2021 18:48:51 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=17031 Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas & oats for a flourless & milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe If you are looking...

Read More

The post Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas & oats for a flourless & milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A stack of banana pancakes on a plate topped with slices of banana and a line of honey being poured over from honey dipper.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

If you are looking for a flourless and milk free option for Pancake day then this is your recipe. These soft and naturally sweetened, healthy pancakes are packed with banana and oats and are held together with eggs. A lovely nutritious alternative to the usual stodgy pancake. Serve up with extra banana to ensure you are getting in 1 of your 5 day and add a drizzle of honey to make them all the more tempting.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this healthy pancakes recipe at home you will need:

Ingredients needed to make healthy banana pancakes.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Rolled oats: Use rolled oats or porridge oats which will absorb and soften up quicker than whole oats. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label of the oats for gluten.

Bananas: Make sure to use ripe bananas or even bananas with skin that has browned slightly. Under ripe bananas will be less sweet and more difficult to mash.

Baking powder: Baking powder helps the pancakes to rise during cooking so making them light and fluffy. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label on your baking powder and make sure it doesn't contain gluten.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess. Not using any butter or oil will mean the banana pancakes will burn easily or at the very least will go very dark brown during cooking.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Peel and roughly chop the bananas and place in a large bowl.
  2. Use a fork or masher to mash up the bananas.
  3. Add the eggs, oats, ground almonds and baking powder to the bowl.
  4. Whisk everything together into a batter. The batter will have a more lumpy consistency compared to normal pancake batter, due to the oats and banana. These lumps will soften and blend during cooking.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Leave the batter to stand for 5 minutes to allow the oats to completely soften.
  6. Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a low-medium heat scoop one heaped tablespoon into the pan and spread into a small circle shape with the back of the spoon. This pancake batter isn't as forgiving as usual batter and will need a little help to spread into a nice shape.
  7. Cook for around 1 minute, keeping the heat low-medium. Gently lift one edge with a spatula to check how its cooking. Be aware that banana pancakes are more delicate than normal pancakes and brown a lot quicker.
  8. Flip the pancake carefully using a spatula when it just starts to turn a golden brown underneath. Cook on the second side for a further 30 seconds or until golden brown. Don't be tempted to try and toss these pancakes!Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil. Or eat as you cook and serve with extra sliced banana and a drizzle of honey.

💭 Expert tips

  • During cooking, banana pancakes brown a lot quicker than standard pancakes. To help with this make sure the pan is well buttered or oiled before adding the batter and keep the heat low-medium. Also, use a spatula to carefully check the underside of the pancake regularly before flipping.
  • Handle these pancakes with care when flipping over as they can be quite delicate.
  • For extra flavour and texture mix dried fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Once the batter is mixed leave to stand for 5 minutes, or a bit longer if you have time, to allow the oats to fully soften.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What toppings to serve with banana pancakes?

The most simple topping for banana pancakes is more banana and a drizzle of honey. However, these healthy pancakes are great on their own. The banana ensures a moisture texture and naturally sweet flavour.

Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Can you reheat these pancakes?

In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes or pop each pancake in the toaster until warm.

Are these healthy pancakes gluten free?

These healthy pancakes are gluten free but do contain oats and baking powder. In some instances oats and baking powder can contain gluten. Make sure to use gluten free baking powder and always check the labels of the oats and baking powder. Oats are naturally gluten free but can contain traces of gluten if they are produced in the same place as other gluten containing cereals.

Can these pancakes be frozen?

Once made, allow to fully cool then place in a sealed container and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost and reheat all in one go in either the microwave or toaster until warmed through.

Stack of banana pancakes topped with sliced bananas, and with a wedge skewered and cut out from one side of the pancake stack and put to the side.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

🍌 Other Banana recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A stack of banana pancakes on a plate topped with slices of banana and a line of honey being poured over from above.
Print

Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats)

Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas and oats for a flourless and milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch, Dessert
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free, Low Fat, Low Lactose
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 8 Pancakes
Calories 71kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Fork or masher
  • Whisk
  • Frying pan
  • Large spoon or tablespoon
  • Spatula

Ingredients

  • 2 medium bananas
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 tablespoon ground almonds
  • 50 g rolled oats or porridge oats
  • knob of Butter for cooking

Instructions

  • Peel and roughly chop the bananas and place in a large bowl.
  • Use a fork or masher to mash up the bananas.
  • Add the eggs, oats, ground almonds and baking powder to the bowl.
  • Whisk everything together into a batter. The batter will have a more lumpy consistency compared to normal pancake batter, due to the oats and banana. These lumps will soften and blend during cooking.
  • Leave the batter to stand for 5 minutes to allow the oats to completely soften.
  • Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a low-medium heat, scoop one heaped tablespoon into the pan and spread into a small circle shape with the back of the spoon. This pancake batter isn't as forgiving as usual batter and will need a little help to spread into a nice shape.
  • Cook for around 1 minute, keeping the heat low-medium. Gently lift one edge with a spatula to check how its cooking. Be aware that banana pancakes are more delicate than normal pancakes and brown a lot quicker.
  • Flip the pancake carefully using a spatula when it just starts to turn a golden brown underneath. Cook on the second side for a further 30 seconds or until golden brown. Don't be tempted to try and toss these pancakes!
  • Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil. Or eat as you cook and serve with extra sliced banana and a drizzle of honey.

Notes

Rolled oats: Use rolled oats or porridge oats which will absorb and soften up quicker than whole oats. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label of the oats for gluten.
Bananas: Make sure to use ripe bananas or even bananas with skin that has browned slightly. Under ripe bananas will be less sweet and more difficult to mash.
Baking powder: Baking powder helps the pancakes to rise during cooking so making them light and fluffy. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label on your baking powder and make sure it doesn't contain gluten.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess. Not using any butter or oil will mean the banana pancakes will burn easily or at the very least will go very dark brown during cooking.
Toppings: Sliced banana and a drizzle of honey for a simple topping. Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.
Can you reheat these pancakes? In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes or pop each pancake in the toaster until warm.
Are these healthy pancakes gluten free? These healthy pancakes are gluten free but do contain oats and baking powder. In some instances oats and baking powder can contain gluten. Make sure to use gluten free baking powder and always check the labels of the oats and baking powder. Oats are naturally gluten free but can contain traces of gluten if they are produced in the same place as other gluten containing cereals.
Expert tips:
  • During cooking, banana pancakes brown a lot quicker than standard pancakes. To help with this make sure the pan is well buttered or oiled before adding the batter and keep the heat low-medium. Also, use a spatula to carefully check the underside of the pancake regularly before flipping.
  • Handle these pancakes with care when flipping over as they can be quite delicate.
  • For extra flavour and texture mix dried fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Once the batter is mixed leave to stand for 5 minutes, or a bit longer if you have time, to allow the oats to fully soften.

Nutrition

Calories: 71kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 69mg | Potassium: 144mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 78IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/feed/ 0
Steak and Ale Pie https://properfoodie.com/steak-and-ale-pie/ https://properfoodie.com/steak-and-ale-pie/#comments Tue, 17 Dec 2019 21:07:20 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11546 Steak and ale pie is a classic, 'comfort-food' recipe that will go down well at any dinner table. It features on nearly every pub menu across Britain and it does a wonderful job of warming our hearts and bellies, especially during the winter months. Make this pie at home with fall-apart chunks of braising steak...

Read More

The post Steak and Ale Pie appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Steak and ale pie is a classic, 'comfort-food' recipe that will go down well at any dinner table. It features on nearly every pub menu across Britain and it does a wonderful job of warming our hearts and bellies, especially during the winter months. Make this pie at home with fall-apart chunks of braising steak and either homemade or shop bought shortcrust pastry.

A slice of steak and ale pie on a plate with gravy and tender-stem broccoli with pie dish in the background.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

The joy of this steak and ale pie is in the long slow cook of the filling. Once in the oven you can spend your time doing other things. Then, be welcomed back into the kitchen by a pot of pure food perfection. The steak and ale filling is so good that it can be served up as a stew - with optional mashed potatoes and green veggies on the side. However, it's also worth the extra effort to finish this recipe and make it into a proper pie.

Once the filling is cooked it can be cooled and stored and the pastry and pie can be put together later on or even on a different day. The finished pie is then baked in the oven for a final 45 minutes.

🥘 Ingredients

To make steak and ale pie in a 21cm (8 inch) pie dish, which will serve 4-6 people:

For the filling:

  • 20g butter
  • 850g braising steak (Usually this is chuck or blade)
  • 2 onions
  • 2 carrots
  • 2 celery sticks
  • 3 tablespoon plain flour
  • 300ml Amber ale (I used Yorkshire Black Sheep ale)
  • 300ml Beef stock (I used 2 oxo cubes dissolved in 300ml of water)
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce (optional)
  • Few sprigs of fresh Parsley, thyme and 2 bay leaves tied together in a bundle with some string (bouquet garni)

For the pastry:

  • 400g plain flour
  • 200g unsalted butter
  • 1 egg yolk (optional - adds a bit a richness but not necessary)
  • Pinch of salt
  • Around 50-100ml of cold water.
  • 1 egg to glaze
  • Extra flour for rolling out pastry
  • A bit of margarine/soft butter and flour to grease and flour the pie dish

Ingredient notes

Steak: Choose braising steak, beef brisket or beef cheeks, which will turn tender and fall apart after a long slow cook. Lamb neck and shoulder are also great for cooking long and slow and making into a lamb pie.

Vegetables: Onion, carrot and celery are the basic veg that add a great flavour to any one pot recipe. I recommend using at least these three vegetable. But you have any other leftover veg lying around then definitely chop it up and pop it in as well.

Stock: Choose a good quality stock as this will make the base of the filling, if using stock cubes I recommend beef oxo for this recipe.

Ale: Choose a pale ale that won't bee too overpowering. If you prefer you can leave the ale out completely and just make up the liquid amount with some extra stock.

Pastry: If you prefer you can use shop bought shortcrust pastry. Or if you don't want to use pastry, top your pie with mash potato instead!

🔪 Step by step instructions

How to make the filling

  1. Pre heat oven to 160°C/140°C Fan/325°F. Place casserole dish on a medium heat, add the butter, then sear off the chunks of braising steak. You may need to do this in batches, then remove and set to one side.
  2. Keep the casserole dish on the medium heat (add more butter if required) then add the chopped onions, celery and carrot and cook until starting to soften.
  3. Sprinkle 3 tablespoon plain flour over the veg and mix in, this will help to thicken the gravy later on.
  4. Next pour in the pale/amber ale, beef stock and Worcestershire sauce, stir and start to bring the whole pot to the boil.Four images showing how to make the filling for steak and ale pie for steps 1-4.
  5. Meanwhile, bunch together the sprigs of parsley and thyme. Wrap the bay leaves around the sprigs and then tie together with string to create a ‘bouquet garni’. Add the bouquet garni to the pot and dunk into the centre using a spoon.
  6. Once the stew starts to boil, place on the lid and transfer to the centre of a pre heated oven and bake for 2 hours 30 minutes or until the beef is tender and falling apart. Check occasionally and add water or more stock if the liquid is reducing too much.Two images showing how to make the filling for steak and ale pie for steps 5-6.
  7. Once cooked, remove from the oven. Transfer the filling to a dish or container using a slotted spoon or sieve, leaving the gravy behind in the casserole dish. Leave the steak filling on the side to cool completely and transfer the gravy to a separate container for later. (Once cooled you can start to put together the pie - see below. Or cover the filling and store in the fridge until you are ready to make your pie).

How to make the pastry

  1. Make your pastry whilst the filling is cooking in the oven. Add the flour, cold butter and a pinch of salt to a large mixing bowl. Rub together the butter into the flour using your fingertips until like breadcrumbs. 
  2. Next add the egg yolk and roughly mix in with a knife.
  3. Next slowly add in the cold water. You will only need to add a bit at a time and possibly only up to 50 or 75ml in total. With each small addition mix in with your fingers and start to bring together into a pastry with your hands.
  4. Stop adding water as soon as the pastry is together in one piece. Turn out onto the work surface and shape into a ball. Cut the pastry in half, then wrap each half in cling film and chill for at least 20 minutes.Four images showing how to make shortcrust pastry steps 1-4.

Putting the pie together

  1. Pre heat the oven to (200°C/180°C fan/400°F). After the pastry has been chilling for 20 minutes, take one of the pastry halves and remove the cling film. Flour your work surface then carefully roll out the pastry. You want to roll this to be slightly bigger than your pie dish so that it will cover the base and the sides of the dish.
  2. Grease a 21cm (8 inch) pie dish. Use the rolling pin to manoeuvre the pastry into position inside the dish. Use your finger tips to gently push the pastry into the corners and sides of the dish. Try not to over handle the pastry whilst doing this. Use a knife to trim off the edges.
  3. Next take the cooled steak and ale filling and add to the pastry lined pie dish. Fill to the top and then use the back of a spoon to gentle press down on the filling and flatten the top.
  4. Now take the second half of the pastry, unwrap, flour work top and roll out as before. Use the rolling pin again to help position the pastry over the top of the filling. Trim with a knife and seal the edges with a fork.Four images showing how to put together steak pie steps 1-4.
  5. Cut two small holes in the top of the pastry lid to allow steam to escape. Use any trimmed off pastry to cut out pastry leaves for decoration. Stick the leaves into place with a bit of water and then glaze the whole pastry lid with egg.
  6. Place the pie in the centre of the pre heated oven and bake for 45 minutes until the filling is bubbling and the pastry is golden.Two images showing the final steps of making a steak and ale pie.
  7. Heat up the gravy saved from earlier and serve with the pie and your choice of veg and potatoes.

💭 Expert tips

Pie dish: grease your pie dish with margarine or soft butter then use a sieve to sprinkle flour over the top of the butter. Knock out any excess flour by turning upside down over the sink and lightly tapping the dish. This will help to stop the pastry sticking to the dish during baking.

Pie filling: make sure the steak filling has completely cooled before placing onto the pastry base. Hot or warm filling will result in soggy pastry, which won't crisp up in the oven.

Pastry: When mixing ingredients for the pastry use your finger tips so keeping the heat of your hands away from the pastry mix. This helps to keep the pastry cool. Chill the pastry once its made. cold pastry is easier to roll out and helps to stop shrinkage in the oven.

Oven temperatures: cook the filling long and slow on a low temperature (160°C/140°C Fan/325°F). Cook the pie for 45 minutes at a higher temperature (200°C/180°C fan/400°F).

Gravy: Once the filling is cooked strain the gravy off. Keep the gravy to one side for pouring over your finished pie later. The beef filling should then go into the pie with as little gravy as possible. This means more beef can be compacted into the pie and less liquid means the pastry won't go soggy.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Timings for steak and ale pie:

The filling for this pie will take around 20 minutes to prepare before being cooked long and slow in the oven for around 2 hours 30mins. So you could make the filling first thing in the morning and even go out once its in the oven. After cooking, the filling needs to be thoroughly cooled, so leave plenty of time for this to happen. If you are making the pastry you will need 20 minutes for the pastry to chill in the fridge before rolling it out. Once the pie is assembled the whole thing goes back in the oven at a slightly higher temperature for around 45 minutes.

Whats the best ale to cook with?

For a steak filling that is not too overpowering with the tang of ale, its best to choose lighter ales usually labelled as pale, amber or light brown. For this recipe I chose an amber ale.

Do you blind bake pastry for steak pie?

In this recipe there is no blind baking required. If the base pastry is thin enough and if the filling is cooled properly before adding to the dish then the pastry should cook well and crisp up nicely (both on top and on the base).
However, if you feel your pastry is a little on the thick side and you don't have time to thoroughly cool your filling, then your pastry base will probably benefit from a quick 10 minute blind bake.

How to store?

The filling and pastry can both be made and then stored in the fridge for up to a day or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before assembling into a pie or use directly from the fridge. Leftover pie can be completely cooled then wrapped in cling film and stored for 1-2 days in the fridge. To reheat bring to room temp then cover with foil and warm in the oven for around 30 minutes or until piping hot throughout.

Homemade steak and ale pie served on a plate with pie dish and gravy boat in the background.

🍖 Other steak recipes:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A slice of steak and ale pie on a plate with gravy and tender-stem broccoli with pie dish in the background.
Print

Steak and Ale Pie

Steak and ale pie is a classic, 'comfort-food' recipe that will go down well at any dinner table. It features on nearly every pub menu across Britain and it does a wonderful job of warming our hearts and bellies, especially during the winter months. Make this pie at home with fall-apart chunks of braising steak and either homemade or shop bought shortcrust pastry.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine British
Prep Time 1 hour
Cook Time 3 hours 15 minutes
Total Time 4 hours 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 1377kcal

Equipment

  • Medium sized casserole dish (dutch oven) with lid
  • Large mixing bowl
  • rolling pin
  • 21cm (8 inch) pie dish

Ingredients

For the filling

  • 20 g butter
  • 850 g braising steak (this is usually chuck or blade)
  • 2 onions roughly chopped 400g

  • 2 carrots peeled and chopped into 1cm pieces 225g
  • 2 celery sticks finely chopped
  • 3 tablespoon plain flour
  • 300 ml Amber ale I used Yorkshire Black Sheep ale

  • 300 ml Beef stock I used 2 oxo cubes dissolved in 300ml of water

  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • Few sprigs of fresh Parsley thyme and 2 bay leaves tied together in a bundle with some string bouquet garni

For the pastry

  • 400 g plain flour
  • 200 g unsalted butter
  • 1 egg yolk optional - adds a bit a richness but not necessary

  • Pinch of salt
  • Around 50-100ml of cold water.
  • Extra flour for rolling out pastry
  • 1 egg to glaze
  • A bit of margarine/soft butter and flour to grease and flour the pie dish
  • If you prefer you can use shop bought shortcrust pastry

Instructions

How to make the filling

  • Pre heat oven to 160°C/140°C Fan/325°F. Place casserole dish on a medium heat, add the butter, then sear off the chunks of braising steak. You may need to do this in batches, then remove and set to one side.
    20 g butter, 850 g braising steak
  • Keep the casserole dish on the medium heat (add more butter if required) then add the chopped onions, celery and carrot and cook until starting to soften.
    2 onions roughly chopped, 2 celery sticks finely chopped, 2 carrots peeled and chopped into 1cm pieces
  • Sprinkle 3 tablespoon plain flour over the veg and mix in, this will help to thicken the gravy later on.
    3 tablespoon plain flour
  • Next pour in the pale/amber ale, beef stock and Worcestershire sauce, stir and start to bring the whole pot to the boil.
    300 ml Amber ale, 300 ml Beef stock, 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • Meanwhile, bunch together the sprigs of parsley and thyme. Wrap the bay leaves around the sprigs and then tie together with string to create a ‘bouquet garni’. Add the bouquet garni to the pot and dunk into the centre using a spoon.
    Few sprigs of fresh Parsley thyme and 2 bay leaves tied together in a bundle with some string
  • Once the stew starts to boil, place on the lid and transfer to the centre of a pre heated oven and bake for 2 hours 30 minutes or until the beef is tender and falling apart. Check occasionally and add water or more stock if the liquid is reducing too much.
  • Once cooked, remove from the oven. Transfer the filling to a dish or container using a slotted spoon or sieve, leaving the gravy behind in the casserole dish. Leave the steak filling on the side to cool completely and transfer the gravy to a separate container for later. (Once cooled you can start to put together the pie - see below. Or cover the filling and store in the fridge until you are ready to make your pie).

How to make the pastry

  • Make your pastry whilst the filling is cooking in the oven. Add the flour, cold butter and a pinch of salt to a large mixing bowl. Rub together the butter into the flour using your fingertips until like breadcrumbs.
    400 g plain flour, 200 g unsalted butter, Pinch of salt
  • Next add the egg yolk and roughly mix in with a knife.
    1 egg yolk
  • Next slowly add in the cold water. You will only need to add a bit at a time and possibly only up to 50 or 75ml in total. With each small addition mix in with your fingers and start to bring together into a pastry with your hands.
    Around 50-100ml of cold water.
  • Stop adding water as soon as the pastry is together in one piece. Turn out onto the work surface and shape into a ball. Cut the pastry in half, then wrap each half in cling film and chill for at least 20 minutes.
    If you prefer you can use shop bought shortcrust pastry

Putting the pie together

  • Pre heat the oven to (200°C/180°C fan/400°F). After the pastry has been chilling for 20 minutes, take one of the pastry halves and remove the cling film. Flour your work surface then carefully roll out the pastry. You want to roll this to be slightly bigger than your pie dish so that it will cover the base and the sides of the dish.
    Extra flour for rolling out pastry
  • Grease a 21cm (8 inch) pie dish. Use the rolling pin to manoeuvre the pastry into position inside the dish. Use your finger tips to gently push the pastry into the corners and sides of the dish. Try not to over handle the pastry whilst doing this. Use a knife to trim off the edges.
    A bit of margarine/soft butter and flour to grease and flour the pie dish
  • Next take the cooled steak and ale filling and add to the pastry lined pie dish. Fill to the top and then use the back of a spoon to gentle press down on the filling and flatten the top.
  • Now take the second half of the pastry, unwrap, flour work top and roll out as before. Use the rolling pin again to help position the pastry over the top of the filling. Trim with a knife and seal the edges with a fork.
  • Cut two small holes in the top of the pastry lid to allow steam to escape. Use any trimmed off pastry to cut out pastry leaves for decoration. Stick the leaves into place with a bit of water and then glaze the whole pastry lid with egg.
    1 egg to glaze
  • Place the pie in the centre of the pre heated oven and bake for 45 minutes until the filling is bubbling and the pastry is golden
  • Heat up the gravy saved from earlier and serve with the pie and your choice of veg and potatoes.

Video

Notes

Timings for steak and ale pie: The filling for this pie will take around 20 minutes to prepare before being cooked long and slow in the oven for around 2 hours 30mins. So you could make the filling first thing in the morning and even go out once its in the oven. After cooking, the filling needs to be thoroughly cooled, so leave plenty of time for this to happen. If you are making the pastry you will need 20 minutes for the pastry to chill in the fridge before rolling it out. Once the pie is assembled the whole thing goes back in the oven at a slightly higher temperature for around 45 minutes.
Oven temperatures: cook the filling long and slow on a low temperature (160°C/140°C Fan/325°F). Cook the pie for 45 minutes at a higher temperature (200°C/180°C fan/400°F).
Whats the best ale to cook with? For a steak filling that is not too overpowering with the tang of ale, its best to choose lighter ales usually labelled as pale, amber or light brown. For this recipe I chose an amber ale.
Do you blind bake pastry for steak pie? In this recipe there is no blind baking required. If the base pastry is thin enough and if the filling is cooled properly before adding to the dish then the pastry should cook well and crisp up nicely (both on top and on the base).
However, if you feel your pastry is a little on the thick side and you don't have time to thoroughly cool your filling, then your pastry base will probably benefit from a quick 10 minute blind bake.
How to store? The filling and pastry can both be made and then stored in the fridge for up to a day or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before assembling into a pie or use directly from the fridge. Leftover pie can be completely cooled then wrapped in cling film and stored for 1-2 days in the fridge. To reheat bring to room temp then cover with foil and warm in the oven for around 30 minutes or until piping hot throughout.
Steak: Choose braising steak (Chuck or blade), beef brisket or beef cheeks, which will turn tender and fall apart after a long slow cook. Lamb neck and shoulder are also great for cooking long and slow and making into a lamb pie.
Vegetables: Onion, carrot and celery are the basic veg that add a great flavour to any one pot recipe. I recommend using at least these three vegetable. But you have any other leftover veg lying around then definitely chop it up and pop it in as well.
Stock: Choose a good quality stock as this will make the base of the filling, if using stock cubes I recommend beef oxo for this recipe.
Ale: Choose a pale ale that won't bee too overpowering. If you prefer you can leave the ale out completely and just make up the liquid amount with some extra stock.
Pastry: When mixing ingredients for the pastry use your finger tips so keeping the heat of your hands away from the pastry mix. This helps to keep the pastry cool. Chill the pastry once its made. cold pastry is easier to roll out and helps to stop shrinkage in the oven. If you prefer you can use shop bought shortcrust pastry. Or if you don't want to use pastry, top your pie with mash potato instead!
Pie dish: grease your pie dish with margarine or soft butter then use a sieve to sprinkle flour over the top of the butter. Knock out any excess flour by turning upside down over the sink and lightly tapping the dish. This will help to stop the pastry sticking to the dish during baking.
Pie filling: make sure the steak filling has completely cooled before placing onto the pastry base. Hot or warm filling will result in soggy pastry, which won't crisp up in the oven.
Gravy: Once the filling is cooked strain the gravy off. Keep the gravy to one side for pouring over your finished pie later. The beef filling should then go into the pie with as little gravy as possible. This means more beef can be compacted into the pie and less liquid means the pastry won't go soggy.

Nutrition

Serving: 741g | Calories: 1377kcal | Carbohydrates: 103g | Protein: 57g | Fat: 81g | Saturated Fat: 43g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 28g | Trans Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 321mg | Sodium: 498mg | Potassium: 1486mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 11259IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 199mg | Iron: 13mg

This post was first published in Dec 2019. Updated in Dec 2021 with new step by step images and expert tips.

The post Steak and Ale Pie appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/steak-and-ale-pie/feed/ 4
Roast Chicken https://properfoodie.com/roast-chicken/ https://properfoodie.com/roast-chicken/#respond Sun, 17 Oct 2021 16:55:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12279 Roast chicken with lemon herb butter, cooked until golden on the outside and tender and juicy on the inside. This simple recipe shows how easy it is to make roast chicken for your Sunday dinner with minimal fuss and maximum flavour. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe A whole roast chicken is a great option for...

Read More

The post Roast Chicken appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Roast chicken with lemon herb butter, cooked until golden on the outside and tender and juicy on the inside. This simple recipe shows how easy it is to make roast chicken for your Sunday dinner with minimal fuss and maximum flavour.

whole chicken roasted and presented on a large plate with cooked carrots and onions and fresh herbs.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

A whole roast chicken is a great option for Sunday dinner at home. Roast chicken is smaller, cheaper and easier to cook than any other roast dinner option. However, Roast beef, Roast Turkey or Leg of lamb are also achievable, but may just require a little more time, effort and expense.

This recipe is all about roasting that perfect chicken with a glistening skin that has been lovingly basted with lemon herb butter. With very little time and effort you can make a succulent whole roast chicken that will go down a storm, especially when served up with all the trimmings. Try with homemade Yorkshire Puddings, crispy roast potatoes, creamy mash potatoes, cauliflower cheese, honey glazed carrots and parsnips, green bean almondine and of course lashings of gravy.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a whole roast chicken with lemon and herb butter you will need:

  • 50g Softened butter
  • 2 cloves Garlic
  • Zest and juice of ½ lemon
  • 3 Sprigs fresh thyme (leaves removed from stems)
  • 1.5 kg Whole chicken
  • 2 Springs rosemary
  • 3 Sprigs thyme
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • ½ Lemon
  • ½ Garlic bulb
  • Salt and pepper
  • Roughly chopped root veggies

Ingredient notes

Recipe: For the full recipe and amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Garlic: This recipe uses fresh garlic but you could substitute with jarred garlic or garlic paste.

Fresh herbs: This recipe uses fresh herbs for the both the butter and chicken. However, if you can't get hold of fresh you can replace each with a teaspoon of dried herbs.

Root vegetables: The root vegetables are used as a rack for the chicken to sit on. I prefer to use veg as it adds to the flavour. However, if you have a metal rack for your roasting tin you can just use this instead.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat the oven to 190°C (Fan) / 375°F. Prepare the herb butter by mashing the butter with minced garlic, lemon juice and zest and fresh thyme leaves. Then set to one side.
  2. Unpack the chicken and remove any giblets from the cavity. If the legs are tied together, un-tie and open up to see inside the cavity. Place half a lemon, half a garlic bulb inside the cavity. Next take 2 sprigs of rosemary, together with 3 sprigs of thyme and wrap 2 bay leaves around the sprigs. Secure the bunch of fresh herbs by wrapping and tying with string. Add the bunch of herbs to the cavity along with the lemon and garlic.
  3. Next, take the lemon herb butter and use the back of a spoon to spread the butter all over the surface of the chicken skin. Make sure to spread over the legs and wings as well.
  4. Once the butter is evenly spread, bring the legs back together to close the entrance to the cavity and tie with string.Four images showing how to cook a whole roast chicken steps 1-4.
  5. Roughly chop up some root vegetables to sit in the base of the roasting tin to act as a rack for the chicken. Carefully transfer the prepared chicken onto the vegetable rack.
  6. Place the roasting tin into the centre of the preheated oven and cook according to the weight of the bird: Cook for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after this. Check the chicken at least once (ideally 2 or 3 times) during cooking and baste (spoon juices back over the skin). If the skin looks like it might be burning at any point, pop over a bit of foil.
  7. Check the chicken is cooked by inserting a skewer into the breast. The juices should run out clear. Alternatively insert a meat thermometer into the breast. If the chicken appears under cooked place back in the oven for 10 minute intervals until cooked. Then cover and rest for around 10 minutes. You can use this time to dish up the rest of your Sunday roast.
  8. After the chicken is well rested, remove the foil and transfer the chicken to a carving board. Carve with a sharp knife and serve.Four images showing how to cook a whole roast chicken steps 5-8..

💭 Expert tips

  • If using fresh garlic in the herb butter: Mince the garlic by chopping finely, then add a pinch of sea salt and scrape the knife over the garlic and salt to create a garlic paste.
  • Cook the chicken on a bed of chopped carrots and onions, which raises the chicken up out of its juices. This adds to the flavour and releases moisture during cooking, which helps to keep the meat succulent. 
  • Coat the skin in the lemon herb butter before cooking to add flavour and to keep moisture in.
  • Sit the chicken on a rack of chopped veg (which will release moisture) to help prevent the meat from drying out.
  • Baste the chicken two or three times during cooking to keep the flavour in and to help the skin cook and turn golden brown.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Do you cover roast chicken?

Covering a chicken with foil during roasting is not necessary and I much prefer to leave the skin uncovered giving it plenty of time to turn to a nice golden brown colour. Follow the tips above to ensure the meat stays nice and juicy.

How long does it take to roast a chicken?

As a general rule chicken should be roasted for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after that. So a 1.5kg chicken would need 1 hour 20 minutes and a 2kg chicken would need 1 hour 40 minutes. During roasting the chicken should be checked at least once (2 or 3 times if you can) and basted with the juices.

What oven temperature for roast chicken?

To make sure a chicken is thoroughly cooked, it should be roasted at approximately 180-190°C (Fan) / 350-375°F. You can pick the higher or lower end of this depending on how your oven cooks.

What temperature should a thermometer read for chicken?

You should be looking for the thermometer to reach 75°C / 165°F when inserted into the middle of the chicken breast. 

Whole roast chicken with golden skin served on a large plate surrounded by roast carrots, onions and fresh herbs.

🥘 Other sunday roast recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

whole chicken roasted and presented on a large plate with cooked carrots and onions and fresh herbs.
Print

Roast Chicken

Roast chicken with lemon herb butter, cooked until golden on the outside and tender and juicy on the inside. This simple recipe shows how easy it is to make roast chicken for your Sunday dinner with minimal fuss and maximum flavour.
Course Dinner, roast dinner, sunday dinner, sunday lunch
Cuisine British
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 496kcal

Equipment

  • Medium mixing bowl
  • String (for tying herbs together and for tying together chicken legs)
  • Large roasting tin
  • Carving knife

Ingredients

For the lemon herb butter

  • 50 g Softened butter
  • 2 cloves Garlic
  • ½ lemon juiced and zested
  • 3 Sprigs fresh thyme leaves removed from stems

For the chicken:

  • 1.5 kg Whole chicken
  • ½ Lemon
  • ½ Garlic bulb
  • 2 Springs rosemary
  • 3 Sprigs thyme
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • Salt and pepper
  • Root veggies roughly chopped to sit the chicken on in the tray

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 190°C (Fan) / 375°F. Prepare the herb butter by mashing the butter with minced garlic, lemon juice and zest and fresh thyme leaves. Set to one side. 
NOTE: Mash together using a fork.
    50 g Softened butter, 2 cloves Garlic, ½ lemon juiced and zested, 3 Sprigs fresh thyme
  • Remove and discard any packaging from the chicken. If you have bought the chicken from your butchers check the cavity for the giblets. Remove and discard the giblets or if you prefer use to make gravy.
If the legs are tied together, un-tie and open up to see inside the cavity. Place half a lemon, half a garlic bulb inside the cavity. Next take 2 sprigs of rosemary, together with 3 sprigs of thyme and wrap 2 bay leaves around the sprigs. Secure the bunch of fresh herbs by wrapping and tying with string. Add the bunch of herbs to the cavity along with the lemon and garlic.
    1.5 kg Whole chicken, 2 Springs rosemary, 3 Sprigs thyme, ½ Lemon, ½ Garlic bulb, 2 Bay leaves
  • Next, take the lemon herb butter and use the back of a spoon to spread the butter all over the surface of the chicken skin. Make sure to spread over the legs and wings as well. Sprinkle salt and pepper over the top of the butter.
    Salt and pepper
  • Once the butter is evenly spread, bring the legs back together to close the entrance to the cavity and tie with string.
  • Roughly chop up some root vegetables to sit in the base of the roasting tin to act as a rack for the chicken. Carefully transfer the prepared chicken onto the vegetable rack.
    Root veggies roughly chopped to sit the chicken on in the tray
  • Place the roasting tin into the centre of the preheated oven and cook according to the weight of the bird: Cook for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after this. Check the chicken at least once (ideally 2 or 3 times) during cooking and baste (spoon juices back over the skin). If the skin looks like it might be burning at any point, pop over a bit of foil.
  • Check the chicken is cooked by inserting a skewer into the breast. The juices should run out clear. Alternatively insert a meat thermometer into the breast. If the chicken appears under cooked place back in the oven for 10 minute intervals until cooked.
If you are satisfied that the chicken is thoroughly cooked, cover with foil and then a tea towel (to keep the heat in) and rest for around 10 minutes. You can use this time to dish up the rest of your Sunday roast.
  • After the chicken is well rested, remove the foil and transfer the chicken to a carving board. Carve with a sharp knife and serve.

Video

Notes

Garlic: This recipe uses fresh garlic but you could substitute with jarred garlic or garlic paste.
Fresh herbs: This recipe uses fresh herbs for the both the butter and chicken. However, if you can't get hold of fresh you can replace each with a teaspoon of dried herbs.
Root vegetables: the root vegetables are used as a rack for the chicken to sit on. I prefer to use veg as it adds to the flavour. However, if you have a metal rack for your roasting tin you can just use this instead.
Do you cover roast chicken? Covering a chicken with foil during roasting is not necessary and I much prefer to leave the skin uncovered giving it plenty of time to turn to a nice golden brown colour. Follow the ‘expert tips’ in the post above to ensure the meat stays nice and juicy.
How long does it take to roast a chicken? As a general rule chicken should be roasted for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after that. So a 1.5kg chicken would need 1 hour 20 minutes and a 2kg chicken would need 1 hour 40 minutes. During roasting the chicken should be checked at least once (2 or 3 times if you can) and basted with the juices.
What oven temperature for roast chicken? To make sure a chicken is thoroughly cooked, it should be roasted at approximately 180-190°C (Fan) / 350-375°F. You can pick the higher or lower end of this depending on how your oven cooks.
What temperature should a thermometer read for chicken? If you like to use a meat thermometer to check that your chicken is cooked through, you should be looking for the thermometer to reach 75°C / 165°F when inserted into the middle of the chicken breast. 

Nutrition

Serving: 394g | Calories: 496kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 162mg | Sodium: 217mg | Potassium: 429mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 882IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Feb 2020. Updated in Oct 2021 with new step by step instructions and expert tips.

 

 

 

The post Roast Chicken appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/roast-chicken/feed/ 0
Leek and Potato Soup https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/#respond Fri, 24 Jan 2020 16:18:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12133 Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable,...

Read More

The post Leek and Potato Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable, tasty and a great recipe for batch cooking and stocking up the freezer.

A bowl of leek and potato soup topped with a swirl of cream and chopped chives.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Not only is leek and potato soup tasty and comforting but its also a really nutritious recipe and perfect for refuelling on a cold day. Potatoes are a starchy carbohydrate and a great source of calcium, Iron and B vitamins. With the skins on, potatoes also provide a good source of fibre. So to boost the fibre and the texture of this recipe, give your tatties a good wash and leave the skins on!

This warming, full flavoured, healthy potato soup also contains 1 portion of your 5 a day, from the onions, celery and leeks. Plus, each serving of soup comes in at under 300kcal, meaning that theres plenty of room left for a nice chunk of crusty bread on the side. For a soup without potatoes that still contains plenty of nutrients try my rustic, traditional Tuscan ribollita soup

🥘 Ingredients

To make a pot of this delicious leek and potato soup, to serve 4 people, you will need:

  • Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 
  • 2 celery sticks chopped 
  • 2 medium leeks chopped 
  • 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed
  • Vegetable stock 
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 tablespoon double cream (optional)
  • Chopped chives and extra cream to serve (optional)

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Butter: Use butter for a richer flavour, but if you prefer you can substitute with a tablespoon of oil.

Leeks: The best part of the leek to use for soup is the white and light green parts. The darker green parts toward the top of the plant tend to be a bit tough and fibrous - not great if your wanting to make a soup! before chopping leeks make sure the insides are clean. To do this slice the leek in half length ways to reveal all the layers inside. Then carefully run each half under the cold water tap to wash aways any bits of dirt caught between the layers. 

Potatoes: For a creamy soup opt for a fluffy potato such as Maris Piper or King Edward. If you want a chunky soup then use waxy potatoes (Charlotte), which will hold together better. 

Celery: Celery adds a wonderful flavour alongside the onion, however, the soup won't be ruined of you prefer not to add celery.

Vegetable stock: Use good quality vegetable stock.

Double cream and chives: these are a serving suggestion and completely optional. If you decide to use the cream, add a bit at a time and taste until you are happy.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat and melt 30g of butter. Add the chopped onions and celery and gently fry until the onions are soft.
  2. Add the chopped leeks and potatoes to the pan and stir in well.
  3. Next pour in the vegetable stock and bring to a gentle simmer
  4. Place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.Step by step images of how to make leek and potato soup steps 1-4.
  5. When the potatoes are fully cooked, thoroughly blend the soup until smooth. Do this by either transferring the soup to a blender or use a hand blender directly in the pan. If you would prefer a chunky soup then only blend half and then mix with the unblended half. 
  6. Have extra water ready to add if you want to thin the consistency of your soup. I usually thin mine down to the point where it lightly coats the back of a spoon. When you're happy with the consistency, taste the soup and add salt if needed.
  7. For extra creamy soup stir in 2 tablespoon of double cream (optional).
  8. Serve the soup in bowls and if you like top with extra cream and chopped chives.Step by step images of how to make leek and potato soup steps 5-8.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you make a chunky leek and potato soup?

To make a chunky soup instead of smooth, only blend half of the soup and then mix back into the unblended half.

How do you make potato soup thicker?

As potatoes are starchy its usual for this type of soup to be too thick rather than too thin. The addition of extra stock or water will help to thin it out. However, if you add too much water you may end up with soup that is too thin. To avoid this add any extra water or stock a bit at a time and stir in well before adding more.
If your soup is too thin you can thicken it back up by gently heating and gradually reducing down.

How to store?

Leek and potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days. If you are adding cream, check that this has a good date on it and will keep for the 3 days. Alternatively only add the cream when you are ready to eat the soup. Alternatively freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. As potatoes are super starchy make sure you stir the soup continually during reheating or the potato may stick to the bottom of the pan and burn.

What to serve with leek and potato soup?

Leek and potato soup is best served up with a crunchy piece of buttered bread or soft, white homemade bread rolls.

What is Vichyssoise?

The french name for leek and potato soup is Vichyssoise soup. Vichyssoise is slightly different to this recipe as its usually a fully blended soup thats served cold. 

A bowl of homemade leek and potato soup with a second bowl of soup in the background.

🥔 How can I get more potatoes into my diet?

Potatoes are so versatile and they are great served up with most things.  Like roast potatoes or mashed potatoes with your roast chicken or roast beef dinner on a Sunday. Or if you just want an easy side to go with your mid week meals try these garlic, herb foil pack potatoes. Other potato soups that are just as satisfying as leek and potato on a cold day are celeriac and potato soup or creamy clam chowder.  Or for a meal thats a little more substantial why not try my super affordable Frozen Salmon and potato traybake? Or salmon and mackerel fishcakes.

If you want something a little more indulgent then add potatoes to a pie: fish pie, minted lamb pie, cottage pie or shepherds pie. 

🍵 Other soup recipes you might like:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A bowl of leek and potato soup topped with a swirl of cream and chopped chives.
Print

Leek and potato soup

Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable, tasty and a great recipe for batch cooking and stocking up the freezer.
Course main meal, starter, starter or main
Cuisine British, French
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 248kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 30 g Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 125g
  • 2 celery sticks chopped 100g
  • 2 medium leeks chopped 200
  • 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed 600g
  • 500 ml vegetable stock Plus extra water if required
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 tablespoon double cream Optional
  • Chopped chives and extra cream to serve Optional

Instructions

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat and melt 30g of butter. Add the chopped onions and celery and gently fry until the onions are soft.
    30 g Butter, 1 Onion finely chopped, 2 celery sticks chopped
  • Add the chopped leeks and potatoes to the pan and stir in well.
    2 medium leeks chopped, 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed
  • Next pour in the vegetable stock and bring to a gentle simmer
    500 ml vegetable stock
  • Place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  • When the potatoes are fully cooked, thoroughly blend the soup until smooth. Do this by either transferring the soup to a blender or use a hand blender directly in the pan. If you would prefer a chunky soup then only blend half and then mix with the unblended half.
  • Have extra water ready to add if you want to thin the consistency of your soup. I usually thin mine down to the point where it lightly coats the back of a spoon. When you're happy with the consistency, taste the soup and add salt if needed.
    Pinch of salt
  • For extra creamy soup stir in 2 tablespoon of double cream (optional).
    2 tablespoon double cream
  • Serve the soup in bowls and if you like top with extra cream and chopped chives.
    Chopped chives and extra cream to serve

Video

Notes

Butter: Use butter for a richer flavour, but if you prefer you can substitute with a tablespoon of oil.
Leeks: The best part of the leek to use for soup is the white and light green parts. The darker green parts toward the top of the plant tend to be a bit tough and fibrous - not great if your wanting to make a soup! before chopping leeks make sure the insides are clean. To do this slice the leek in half length ways to reveal all the layers inside. Then carefully run each half under the cold water tap to wash aways any bits of dirt caught between the layers. 
Potatoes: For a creamy soup opt for a fluffy potato such as Maris Piper or King Edward. If you want a chunky soup then use waxy potatoes (Charlotte), which will hold together better. 
Celery: Celery adds a wonderful flavour alongside the onion, however, the soup won't be ruined of you prefer not to add celery. Vegetable stock: Use good quality vegetable stock.
Double cream and chives: these are a serving suggestion and completely optional. If you decide to use the cream, add a bit at a time and taste until you are happy.
How do you make a chunky leek and potato soup? To make a chunky soup instead of smooth, only blend half of the soup and then mix back into the unblended half.
How do you make potato soup thicker? As potatoes are starchy its usual for this type of soup to be too thick rather than too thin. The addition of extra stock or water will help to thin it out. However, if you add too much water you may end up with soup that is too thin. To avoid this add any extra water or stock a bit at a time and stir in well before adding more. 
If your soup is too thin you can thicken it back up by gently heating and gradually reducing down.
How to store? Leek and potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days. If you are adding cream, check that this has a good date on it and will keep for the 3 days. Alternatively only add the cream when you are ready to eat the soup. Alternatively freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. As potatoes are super starchy make sure you stir the soup continually during reheating or the potato may stick to the bottom of the pan and burn.
What to serve with leek and potato soup? Leek and potato soup is best served up with a crunchy piece of buttered bread or soft, white homemade bread rolls.
What is Vichyssoise? The french name for leek and potato soup is Vichyssoise soup. Vichyssoise is slightly different to this recipe as its usually a fully blended soup thats served cold. 

Nutrition

Serving: 350ml | Calories: 248kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 26mg | Sodium: 645mg | Potassium: 840mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1513IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in Jan 2020. Updated in Sept 2021 with improved photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Leek and Potato Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/feed/ 0
Cauliflower Cheese https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-cheese/ https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-cheese/#comments Tue, 19 Jan 2021 00:01:47 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12215 This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is a full flavoured side dish with a creamy cheese sauce made from scratch and baked to perfection. The sauce takes just 5 minutes to whip together and is made in the traditional way with a roux mix (butter and flour). This is one of my favourite side dishes to...

Read More

The post Cauliflower Cheese appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is a full flavoured side dish with a creamy cheese sauce made from scratch and baked to perfection. The sauce takes just 5 minutes to whip together and is made in the traditional way with a roux mix (butter and flour). This is one of my favourite side dishes to serve up with any meal, and its particularly good with a Sunday roast.

Cauliflower presented in a shallow dish with a creamy sauce and topped with baked on cheese and freshly chopped parsley.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is one of those side dish heros that will always go well with any other main dish. Whether your cooking up a joint for a roast beef dinner or lovingly basting your Sunday Roast Chicken, this delicious recipe will not let you down.

Its also great served up along side steak and ale pie or other classic roast dinner favourites like roast potatoes, mash potatoes, foil pack potatoes, green bean almondine and Yorkshire pudding. 

🥘 Ingredients

To make cauliflower cheese you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make cauliflower cheese with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.

Butter: Butter is required to form the roux, which is the base of the sauce.

Cheese: The simplest cheese sauce uses cheddar and here I have used a medium cheddar. However, you could substitute with other types of cheese for a variety of flavours. Try with red leicester, mozzarella or a blue cheese if you like strong flavours.

Cauliflower: For variations on this dish substitute the cauliflower for broccoli or leeks.

Parsley and black pepper: Optional

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by making the roux. To make the roux place a small milk pan on a medium heat and add 20g of butter. When the butter has melted, stir in 30g plain flour to form a paste - this paste is the roux.
  2. The next step is to turn the roux into a white sauce (or bechamel sauce). To do this gradually add 350ml of semi skimmed milk to the roux whilst continuing to heat and stir.
  3. Once all the milk has been added, you are left with a silky smooth white sauce. Turn the pan down to a low heat and add 50g of grated cheese. Stir in until fully melted into the sauce.
  4. Next, spread cauliflower florets across the base of an 8 inch, shallow ovenproof dish. Pour over the cheese sauce ensuring all the cauliflower is covered.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this cauliflower recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Top with a scattering of extra grated cheese and some black pepper.
  6. Then bake at 180 degrees C for 15 minutes. Remove from the oven and check if the cauliflower is cooked and soft enough by skewering with a knife. If not return, to the oven for a further 5 minutes. A collage of 2 images showing how to make this cauliflower recipe step by step for instructions 5 and 6.
  7. Once cooked, if the top isn't as golden brown as you would like it, place under the grill on a high heat for a couple of minutes or until you are happy with the colour.

💭 Expert tips

  • Preventing a lumpy cheese sauce: When adding the milk to the roux (paste) it is essential to stir continuously. Stopping stirring will cause lumps to form and no amount of stirring after this will get rid of them. You can also remove the pan from the heat as you need to if you feel its getting too hot or if you can't stir fast enough to stop lumps forming.
  • Preventing a skin forming on the sauce: When the sauce has been made and is removed from the heat it will immediately start to cool. During this process a skin will start to form on top of the sauce. This may happen before you get chance to pour it over the cauliflower. To prevent this, place a piece of cling film directly onto the surface of the sauce as soon as you take it off the heat. When you are ready to use, remove the cling film and use a spoon to scrape any sauce off the cling film and back into the pan.
  • Variations: Try this cheese sauce over broccoli or leeks or use it to make macaroni cheese. For something a little different why not have a go at sprouts in cheese sauce.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is a roux?

A roux is basically melted butter and flour mixed together to form a paste. This paste is the starting point for making cheese sauce. Many recipes say to use equal amounts of butter and flour, but I prefer to use slightly less butter, to give a thicker roux and to stop any excess butter forming on top of the finished sauce.

Why is my cauliflower cheese watery?

Cauliflower cheese can go watery if the cauliflower is overcooked. Overcooked cauliflower releases water, which will seep into the rest of the dish. So even if your sauce was thick when it went in the oven, if its in there too long, the water from the cauliflower will cause it to go watery.

I would advise to not bake for longer than 20-25 minutes. If by this point its not quite brown enough on top, remove from the oven and place under the grill on high for 1-2 minutes.

Can the recipe be made in advance?

Yes you can prepare this recipe right up until the point its ready to go into the oven. At this point allow the whole thing to cool and then cover and place in the fridge until you are ready to bake it.

Can this recipe be reheated?

You can reheat this recipe if it has been stored correctly. Make sure any leftovers are fully cooled then cover and store in the fridge. When you are ready to reheat remove from the fridge, take off the cover and reheat in the oven for 5 - 10 minutes or in the microwave for 2-3 minutes, until piping hot.

Can cauliflower cheese be frozen?

Cauliflower cheese is best frozen before it has been baked. Make the recipe up to the point that that it would normally go into the oven. Then allow to fully cool, cover with a lid or cling film and freeze for up to 3 months. Fully defrost over night before baking at 180 degrees C for 20 minutes.

Cauliflower in a creamy cheese sauce presented in a shallow dish and topped with baked on cheese and parsley

Other cauliflower recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Cauliflower cheese in a black snd white dish with fresh parsley sprinkled over the top
Print

Cauliflower Cheese

This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is a full flavoured side dish with a creamy cheese sauce made from scratch and baked to perfection. The sauce takes just 5 minutes to whip together and is made in the traditional way with a roux mix (butter and flour). This is one of my favourite side dishes to serve up with any meal, and its particularly good with a Sunday roast.
Course side, Side Dish, sunday roast
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 225kcal

Equipment

  • Small milk pan for the cheese sauce
  • 8 inch, shallow ovenproof dish

Ingredients

  • 20 g Butter
  • 30 g Plain flour
  • 350 ml Semi skimmed milk
  • 50 g Cheddar grated
  • 1 medium cauliflower leaves removed and cut into florets (600g)

For the topping

  • 30 g Cheddar grated
  • Black pepper
  • Freshly chopped parsley

Instructions

  • Start by making the roux. To make the roux place a small milk pan on a medium heat and add 20g of butter. When the butter has melted, stir in 30g plain flour to form a paste - this paste is the roux.
  • The next step is to turn the roux into a white sauce (or bechamel sauce). To do this gradually add 350ml of semi skimmed milk to the roux whilst continuing to heat and stir.
  • Once all the milk has been added, you are left with a silky smooth white sauce. Turn the pan down to a low heat and add 50g of grated cheese. Stir in until fully melted into the sauce.
  • Next, spread cauliflower florets across the base of an 8 inch, shallow ovenproof dish. Pour over the cheese sauce ensuring all the cauliflower is covered.
  • Top with a scattering of extra grated cheese and some black pepper.
  • Then bake at 180 degrees C for 15 minutes. Remove from the oven and check if the cauliflower is cooked and soft enough by skewering with a knife. If not return, to the oven for a further 5 minutes.
  • Once cooked, if the top isn't as golden brown as you would like it, place under the grill on a high heat for a couple of minutes or until you are happy with the colour.

Video

Notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.
Butter: Butter is required to form the roux, which is the base of the sauce.
Cheese: The simplest cheese sauce uses cheddar and here I have used a medium cheddar. However, you could substitute with other types of cheese for a variety of flavours. Try with red leicester, mozzarella or a blue cheese if you like strong flavours.
Parsley and black pepper: Optional
Variations: Try this cheese sauce over broccoli or leeks or use it to make macaroni cheese. For something a little different why not have a go at sprouts in cheese sauce.
Preventing a lumpy cheese sauce: When adding the milk to the roux (paste) it is essential to stir continuously. Stopping stirring will cause lumps to form and no amount of stirring after this will get rid of them. You can also remove the pan from the heat as you need to if you feel its getting too hot or if you can't stir fast enough to stop lumps forming.
Preventing a skin forming on the sauce: When the sauce has been made and is removed from the heat it will immediately start to cool. During this process a skin will start to form on top of the sauce. This may happen before you get chance to pour it over the cauliflower. To prevent this, place a piece of cling film directly onto the surface of the sauce as soon as you take it off the heat. When you are ready to use, remove the cling film and use a spoon to scrape any sauce off the cling film and back into the pan.
Why is my cauliflower cheese watery?: Cauliflower cheese can go watery if the cauliflower is overcooked. Overcooked cauliflower releases water, which will seep into the rest of the dish. So even if your sauce was thick when it went in the oven, if its in there too long, the water from the cauliflower will cause it to go watery. I would advise to not bake for longer than 20-25 minutes. If by this point its not quite brown enough on top, remove from the oven and place under the grill on high for 1-2 minutes.

Nutrition

Serving: 272g | Calories: 225kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 246mg | Potassium: 583mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 415IU | Vitamin C: 72mg | Calcium: 282mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in January 2020. Updated in January 2021 with new ingredients photo, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Cauliflower Cheese appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-cheese/feed/ 5
Traditional Tiramisu Recipe https://properfoodie.com/tiramisu/ https://properfoodie.com/tiramisu/#comments Wed, 03 Mar 2021 23:16:30 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4927 Tiramisu is a light and airy, no bake, Italian dessert made with layers of creamy mascarpone and coffee dipped ladyfingers. This traditional tiramisu recipe is made in the authentic Italian way with whipped, raw eggs and mascarpone cheese. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe This tiramisu recipe is made in the traditional way using raw...

Read More

The post Traditional Tiramisu Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Tiramisu is a light and airy, no bake, Italian dessert made with layers of creamy mascarpone and coffee dipped ladyfingers. This traditional tiramisu recipe is made in the authentic Italian way with whipped, raw eggs and mascarpone cheese.

A small, square piece of tiramisu on a plate with the side view showing layers of sponge fingers and creamy mascarpone. The top is dusted with cocoa powder and a large dish of tiramisu is in the background.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This tiramisu recipe is made in the traditional way using raw eggs, mascarpone cheese and ladyfingers dipped in strong coffee. There is no cream, which helps to keep this recipe light and airy. I like to try and keep things as authentic as possible and this Tiramisu comes straight from Italy. The recipe is adapted from a chef who works at Tenuta Torciano; a little winery in Tuscany. We visited Torciano whilst on our Italian honeymoon in 2017.

Making tiramisu this way may not be to everyones taste. As this is a no bake dessert the eggs are actually raw when served. However, this is what makes this dessert so incredible and the best tiramisu always uses raw eggs and no cream. Below I will show you how to prepare the eggs and tiramisu dessert properly so that you feel confident about serving up this traditional tiramisu recipe.

Please note that young children, pregnant women and those who are clinically vulnerable should avoid foods containing raw eggs, including tiramisu. In general I recommend using fresh eggs that have a lion stamp (UK). If you are not UK based then you should try to use fresh, pasteurised eggs.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this traditional tiramisu recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make a traditional tiramisu recipe.

Ingredient notes

Ladyfingers: Use hard, crisp sponge fingers (not soft). The traditional tiramisu biscuits that are used in a traditional tiramisu are called Savoiardi. I used a deep dish (23x18x7cm) for this recipe and so needed 48 ladyfingers across 3 layers. You may need more or less depending on the size and depth of your dish.

Strong coffee: Freshly brew the coffee and if you can, use an espresso machine or ground coffee in a cafetiere. If you don't have access to these you can substitute for instant coffee.

Coffee liqueur: Optional - leave out if you prefer. I like to use Tia Maria, but any coffee liqueur will do.

Mascarpone cheese: Choose a good quality, full fat mascarpone cheese.

Eggs: As mentioned above, the eggs in this recipe will remain raw so make sure to use fresh eggs with the lion stamp (UK). Or if not in the UK use fresh, pasteurised eggs.

Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is essential in this recipe. It is added to the egg yolks and when whisked together the yolks become thick and creamy. This is known and a sabayon.

Cocoa powder: For dusting on the top of the finished dessert. Leave this off if you prefer and simply scatter with grated chocolate.

Cadburys flake: I love to top my tiramisu with both cocoa powder and crumbled bits of cadburys flake chocolate. If you can't get any flake, just substitute with normal milk chocolate and grate over the top.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by separating the eggs, placing yolks in one bowl and whites in another. Make sure no yolk is mixed in with the whites.
  2. Next set up a stand mixer with whisk attachment or use an electric hand whisk. Place the egg yolks and caster sugar into the mixer and whisk together on high for 5 minutes until the yolks are pale and creamy. 
  3. Change the attachment on the mixer to the paddle (or use a spatula). Add the mascarpone to the creamed yolks and mix together until well combined and thick and creamy.
  4. Transfer the mascarpone to separate large mixing bowl and clean out the stand mixer bowl. Reattach the whisk attachment (or use a clean mixing bowl and electric whisk). Add the egg whites to the mixer and whisk until stiff white peaks form.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Next add the whisked egg whites to the mascarpone mixture one third at a time. Use a spatular to gently fold the whites into the mixture in between each addition.
  6. Now its time to build the tiramisu. Have the creamy mascarpone mixture ready to use along with a large rectangular dish for the tiramisu. In a smaller bowl mix together the coffee and coffee liqueur. Briefly dip each lady finger into the coffee mix then place in the bottom of the rectangular dish. Repeat until the base is covered with a lager of ladyfingers.
  7. Next spoon about a third of the mascarpone mixture over the sponge fingers and smooth out to cover all the sponge using the back of a spoon. Add a second and then third layer of coffee dipped sponge fingers and mascarpone mixture. TIP: The layers in order from the bottom should be: ladyfingers, mascarpone, ladyfingers, mascarpone, lady fingers, mascarpone. If you prefer you can use a shallower dish and just do two layers.
  8. Finish the tiramisu by dusting over cocoa powder and scattering over crumbled or grated chocolate.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Finally, wrap the tiramisu dish in cling film and place into the fridge to chill overnight. Tiramisu is best eaten the next day when the whole thing has chilled completely, the mascarpone cream has set and the sponge has softened.

💭 Expert tips

  • This is a no bake dessert with raw eggs so make sure you use fresh, lion stamped (or pasteurised) eggs.
  • Make absolutely sure no yolk goes into the egg whites, as this will stop the whites from whipping up into stiff peaks.
  • Fold the mascarpone into the yolks using the paddle attachment on the stand mixer or using a spatula. Whisking may cause the mascarpone to curdle.
  • Use hard, crisp sponge fingers (not soft sponge).
  • Don't soak the ladyfingers for too long in the coffee. They literally just need a quick dunk in and out. If the sponge is too soggy the excess liquid will leak into the rest of the dessert.
  • Once made, chill over night and eat the next day. Tiramisu is always best eaten on the second day when it has set and the sponge has softened.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Does tiramisu have raw eggs?

Traditional Italian tiramisu uses raw eggs as does this recipe. For safety it is advised that young children, pregnant women and those who are clinically vulnerable should avoid foods containing raw eggs, including tiramisu. In general, I recommend using fresh eggs that have a lion stamp (UK). If you are not UK based then you should try to use fresh, pasteurised eggs.

Can you substitute raw eggs in tiramisu?

If you would prefer to not use raw eggs you can replace the egg whites with whipping cream (500 ml / 2 cups) and lightly cook the yolk and sugar. To cook the yolks, place the yolks and sugar in a glass mixing bowl and balance this on the top of a pan with a small amount of simmering water in the bottom (double boiler). Whisk the yolks and sugar over the pan allowing the steam to gently cook the yolk. Do not let the water touch the bottom of the bowl.

Why is my tiramisu watery?

Watery tiramisu occurs when the sponge ladyfingers have been soaked in the coffee for too long. The excess coffee drains into the rest of the dessert during chilling and makes the whole thing watery. Remember to dunk the sponge fingers briefly in the coffee; in and out.

How to store?

Once made wrap the tiramisu dish tightly in cling film and store in the fridge for up to 3 days. Tiramisu is always best eaten on the second day after it has chilled overnight.

Can you freeze tiramisu?

Dairy does not freeze or defrost well so I don't recommend that you freeze this dessert.

A large rectangular dish of traditional tiramisu topped with cocoa powder and flake chocolate with a small bowl of chocolate in the foreground

🍨 Other dessert recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A small, square piece of tiramisu on a plate with the side view showing layers of sponge fingers and creamy mascarpone. The top is dusted with cocoa powder and a large dish of tiramisu is in the background.
Print

Traditional Tiramisu Recipe

Tiramisu is a light and airy, no bake, Italian dessert made with layers of creamy mascarpone and coffee dipped ladyfingers. This traditional tiramisu recipe is made in the authentic Italian way with whipped, raw eggs and mascarpone cheese.
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, party food, pudding, sweet, treat
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Chill in the fridge 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 45 minutes
Servings 8 People
Calories 627kcal

Equipment

  • Small bowls to separate eggs
  • Stand mixer or electric handheld whisk
  • Large mixing bowl
  • 23x18cm (9x7inch) rectangular serving dish (7cm/3inch depth)
  • Small bowl for coffee mixture
  • Sieve or duster for the cocoa powder
  • Cling film (plastic wrap)

Ingredients

  • 4 large fresh eggs with lion stamp or pasteurised
  • 150 g caster sugar
  • 500 g mascarpone cheese
  • 300 ml strong coffee
  • 100 ml Tia Maria or preferred coffee liqueur
  • 2 packs Ladyfingers (400g) (to keep it traditional use Savoiardi)
  • 1 teaspoon Cocoa powder
  • 25 g Cadbury flake or milk chocolate broke up or grated

Instructions

  • Start by separating the eggs, placing yolks in one bowl and whites in another. Make sure no yolk is mixed in with the whites.
  • Next set up a stand mixer with whisk attachment or use an electric hand whisk. Place the egg yolks and caster sugar into the mixer and whisk together on high for 5 minutes until the yolks are pale and creamy.
  • Change the attachment on the mixer to the paddle (or use a spatula). Add the mascarpone to the creamed yolks and mix together until well combined and thick and creamy.
  • Transfer the mascarpone to separate large mixing bowl and clean out the stand mixer bowl. Reattach the whisk attachment (or use a clean mixing bowl and electric whisk). Add the egg whites to the mixer and whisk until stiff white peaks form.
  • Next add the whisked egg whites to the mascarpone mixture one third at a time. Use a spatular to gently fold the whites into the mixture in between each addition.
  • Now its time to build the tiramisu. Have the creamy mascarpone mixture ready to use along with a large rectangular dish for the tiramisu. In a smaller bowl mix together the coffee and coffee liqueur. Briefly dip each lady finger into the coffee mix then place in the bottom of the rectangular dish. Repeat until the base is covered with a layer of ladyfingers.
  • Next spoon about a third of the mascarpone mixture over the sponge fingers and smooth out to cover all the sponge using the back of a spoon. Add a second and then third layer of coffee dipped sponge fingers and mascarpone mixture. TIP: The layers in order from the bottom should be: ladyfingers, mascarpone, ladyfingers, mascarpone, lady fingers, mascarpone. If you prefer you can use a shallower dish and just do two layers.
  • Finish the tiramisu by dusting over cocoa powder and scattering over crumbled or grated chocolate.
  • Finally, wrap the tiramisu dish in cling film and place into the fridge to chill overnight. Tiramisu is best eaten the next day when the whole thing has chilled completely, the mascarpone cream has set and the sponge has softened.

Video

Notes

Does tiramisu have raw eggs? Traditional Italian tiramisu uses raw eggs as does this recipe. For safety it is advised that young children, pregnant women and those who are clinically vulnerable should avoid foods containing raw eggs, including tiramisu. In general, I recommend using fresh eggs that have a lion stamp (UK). If you are not UK based then you should try to use fresh, pasteurised eggs.
Can you substitute raw eggs in tiramisu? If you would prefer to not use raw eggs you can replace the egg whites with whipping cream (500 ml / 2 cups) and lightly cook the yolk and sugar. To cook the yolks, place the yolks and sugar in a glass mixing bowl and balance this on the top of a pan with a small amount of simmering water in the bottom (double boiler). Whisk the yolks and sugar over the pan allowing the steam to gently cook the yolk. Do not let the water touch the bottom of the bowl.
Why is my tiramisu watery? Watery tiramisu occurs when the sponge ladyfingers have been soaked in the coffee for too long. The excess coffee drains into the rest of the dessert during chilling and makes the whole thing watery. Remember to dunk the sponge fingers briefly in the coffee; in and out.
How to store? Once made wrap the tiramisu dish tightly in cling film and store in the fridge for up to 3 days. Tiramisu is always best eaten on the second day after it has chilled overnight.
Can you freeze tiramisu? Dairy does not freeze or defrost well so I don't recommend that you freeze this dessert.
Expert tips:
  • Make absolutely sure no yolk goes into the egg whites, as this will stop the whites from whipping up into stiff peaks.
  • Fold the mascarpone into the yolks using the paddle attachment on the stand mixer or using a spatula. Whisking may cause the mascarpone to curdle.
  • Use hard, crisp sponge fingers (not soft sponge).
  • Don't soak the ladyfingers for too long in the coffee. They literally just need a quick dunk in and out. If the sponge is too soggy the excess liquid will leak into the rest of the dessert.
  • Once made, chill over night and eat the next day. Tiramisu is always best eaten on the second day when it has set and the sponge has softened.

Nutrition

Serving: 1eighth | Calories: 627kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 21g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 255mg | Sodium: 142mg | Potassium: 117mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 1272IU | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in September 2017. Updated in March 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

If you would like to access the original recipe you can do so here: Original Tiramisu recipe 2017

The post Traditional Tiramisu Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/tiramisu/feed/ 17
Mexican Chilli Con Carne (with cannellini beans) https://properfoodie.com/smokey-chilli-con-carne-cannellini/ https://properfoodie.com/smokey-chilli-con-carne-cannellini/#comments Fri, 16 Jun 2017 18:44:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4243 This Mexican Chilli con carne recipe uses smoked paprika, ground cumin, chilli powder and tomatoes for the base of the sauce. These ingredients are combined and left to simmer gently for few hours reducing down and infusing to create a wonderfully rich and smokey sauce. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe When it comes to easy...

Read More

The post Mexican Chilli Con Carne (with cannellini beans) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
This Mexican Chilli con carne recipe uses smoked paprika, ground cumin, chilli powder and tomatoes for the base of the sauce. These ingredients are combined and left to simmer gently for few hours reducing down and infusing to create a wonderfully rich and smokey sauce.

chilli con carne in half a bowl with rice in the other half and a second bowl of chilli in the background.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

When it comes to easy weeknight recipes, chilli con carne has to be in the running. Its so quick to prepare and most of the ingredients are store cupboard or fridge basics. Once prepared, Mexican chilli con carne always benefits from a long, slow cook, either in the oven or slow cooker. The longer you leave it the thicker and more flavoursome the chilli. The kidney beans have been swapped for cannellini beans and the chilli is made extra rich and fragrant by the addition of cocoa powder and smoked paprika.

🥘 Ingredients

To make Mexican chilli con carne at home you will need:

ingredients to make chilli con carne

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Cannellini beans: cannellini beans have a soft texture and a light colour. But these can be replaced with the usual kidney bean if you prefer.

Bell pepper and celery: The bell pepper and celery are used in this recipe to add extra flavour and a more chunky texture, but again if you prefer you can leave these out.

Cocoa powder and Worcestershire sauce: To make this dish extra special I use Cocoa powder and Worcestershire sauce as my 'secret chilli ingredients'. Both add a rich flavour to the sauce which cuts through the sweet tomatoes and smokey spices. However, both of these are optional and if you prefer you can just leave them out.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat oven to 160°C/320°F. Add ½ tablespoon olive oil, 1 finely chopped onion, minced garlic cloves and 2 roughly chopped celery sticks to a large pan and stir fry. Then add the mince meat to the pan and roughly break up with a wooden spoon. 
  2. As the meat starts to cook add 1 teaspoon smoked paprika, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon hot chilli powder and 1 finely chopped red chilli pepper.
  3. Next add 2 tins of chopped tomatoes, 200g sliced baby tomatoes, 2 tablespoon tomato puree and 1 beef stock cube dissolved in a small amount of boiling water. Stir well then bring to a simmer.
  4. Add the chopped red bell pepper, 1 tablespoon cocoa powder, 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce and 1 tin of cannellini beans. Mix together well and then cover with a lid or tin foil.step by step images of how to make chilli con carne steps 1-4.
  5. Place in the centre of a preheated oven and cook at 160°C/320°F for 2 hours. Check and stir half way through. Alternatively transfer to a slow cooker and cook on medium for 6-7 hours.
  6. Once cooked remove from the oven. Stir through some freshly chopped coriander and serve in bowls with rice, fresh chillies and soured cream.Images of how to make chilli con carne for recipe steps 5 and 6

💭 Expert tips

  • Use 2 chilli peppers or 2 teaspoon of hot chilli powder if you like your chilli super spicy
  • Instead of dissolving the stock cube in boiling water, try crumbling directly into the chilli so as not to water down the dish.
  • If you are short on time you can simmer the chilli on the stove for an hour or so instead of in the oven or slow cooker. However, for best results always cook in the oven.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Once cooked allow to fully cool then transfer to sealable containers and refrigerate for up to 3 days or freeze for up 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight or in the fridge for 24 hours

Can cook chilli con carne in the slow cooker?

This chilli is best when loaded into an ovenproof dish and then slow cooked in the oven for a few hours. However, it can also be cooked in the slow cooker and this is a great option if you are out all day. Cook on medium in the slow cooker for 6-7 hours.

What to serve with chilli con carne?

The simplest is a nice helping of boiled rice, which can be made a little more interesting by stirring through some freshly chopped coriander and parsley. Being Mexican, Chilli con carne is also fantastic when served with tortilla chips, avocado, guacamole, soured cream, grated cheese and fresh coriander.

Why add cocoa to chilli?

Cocoa powder seems like an odd addition to a savoury dish. However, don't be put off as it really does make this dish extra special. The bitter flavour of the dark chocolate powder cuts through the sweet tang from the tomatoes and balances out the fiery heat from the chillies. You will also note that the cocoa helps to smooth out the chilli as it melts into the sauce - well worth a try!

chilli con carne in a bowl with rice, green chillies, soured cream and fresh coriander

🌯 Other Mexican recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

chilli con carne in a bowl with cannellini beans and rice.
Print

Mexican Chilli Con Carne Recipe (with cannellini beans)

This Mexican Chilli con carne recipe uses smoked paprika, ground cumin, chilli powder and tomatoes for the base of the sauce. These ingredients are combined and left to simmer gently for few hours reducing down and infusing to create a wonderfully rich and smokey sauce.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 492kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 Onion finely chopped (200g)
  • 2 Garlic cloves finely chopped or minced
  • 2 celery sticks roughly chopped (120g)
  • 500 g mince meat ground meat
  • 1 teaspoon Smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon Hot chilli powder
  • 1 red chilli pepper deseeded and finely chopped (20g)
  • 2 tins chopped tomatoes
  • 200 g baby tomatoes halved
  • 2 tablespoon tomato puree
  • 1 beef stock cube
  • 1 red bell pepper deseeded and diced (130g)
  • 1 tablespoon Cocoa powder optional
  • 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce Lea and Perins (optional)
  • 1 tin of cannellini beans drained and rinsed
  • Handful of fresh coriander
  • Soured cream and extra sliced chillies to serve

Instructions

  • Pre heat oven to 160°C/320°F. Place a large wok or frying pan on medium heat. Add the olive oil, onion, minced garlic cloves and 2 roughly chopped celery sticks. Stir fry until the onions and celery are soft.
    ½ tablespoon Olive oil, 1 Onion, 2 Garlic cloves, 2 celery sticks
  • Next add the mince meat to the pan and roughly break up with a wooden spoon.
    500 g mince meat
  • As the meat starts to cook add smoked paprika, ground cumin, hot chilli powder and 1 finely chopped red chilli pepper.
    1 teaspoon Smoked paprika, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon Hot chilli powder, 1 red chilli pepper
  • Stir the spices into the meat and continue to cook until brown all over.
  • Next add the tinned tomatoes, baby tomatoes, tomato puree and 1 beef stock cube dissolved in a small amount of boiling water.
    2 tins chopped tomatoes, 200 g baby tomatoes, 2 tablespoon tomato puree, 1 beef stock cube
  • Stir well to combine all the ingredients then bring to a simmer and allow to cook gently for 5 minutes.
  • Then add the chopped red bell pepper, 1 tablespoon cocoa powder, and 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce.
    1 red bell pepper, 1 tablespoon Cocoa powder, 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • Next add 1 tin of cannellini beans, drained and rinsed. Mix together well and then cover with a lid or tin foil.
    1 tin of cannellini beans
  • Place in the centre of a preheated oven and cook at 160°C/320°F for 2 hours. Check and stir half way through. Alternatively transfer to a slow cooker and cook on medium for 6-7 hours.
  • Once cooked remove from the oven. Stir through some freshly chopped coriander and serve in bowls with rice, fresh chillies and soured cream.
    Handful of fresh coriander, Soured cream and extra sliced chillies to serve

Video

Notes

Serving suggestions: Rice, fresh chillies, tobacco sauce, tortilla chips, avocado, guacamole, soured cream, grated cheese and fresh coriander.
Can you freeze this recipe? Once cooked allow to fully cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight or in the fridge for 24 hours.
Can you reheat cooked chilli? If the chilli has been cooled and then stored correctly (freezer for up to 3 months or fridge for up to 3 days) then it can be reheated. Reheat in the microwave or in a large pan on the stove until piping hot.
What can I use instead of kidney beans? Usually kidney beans are added to chilli - however, any bean will do. In this recipe I’ve used cannellini beans as I prefer the texture and colour.
Expert tips:
  • Use 2 chilli peppers or 2 teaspoon of hot chilli powder if you like your chilli super spicy
  • Instead of dissolving the stock cube in boiling water, try crumbling directly into the chilli so as not to water down the dish.
  • If you are short on time you can simmer the chilli on the stove for an hour or so instead of in the oven or slow cooker. However, for best results always cook in the oven.

Nutrition

Serving: 584g | Calories: 492kcal | Carbohydrates: 114g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 1170mg | Potassium: 427mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 90g | Vitamin A: 1914IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 75mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Jun 2017. Updated in Aug 2021 with an improved recipe and photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Mexican Chilli Con Carne (with cannellini beans) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/smokey-chilli-con-carne-cannellini/feed/ 8
Lamb Pie Recipe https://properfoodie.com/lamb-pies-minted-mash-potato-top/ https://properfoodie.com/lamb-pies-minted-mash-potato-top/#comments Sun, 06 Jun 2021 11:25:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4112 Rich and tender, slow cooked lamb pie encased in crumbly pastry and topped with creamy, horseradish mash potato. The lamb and mint filling is easy to prepare and can be left to cook in the oven or slow cooker for a few hours. This delicious lamb pie recipe is made with a rich, full-flavoured, mint...

Read More

The post Lamb Pie Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Rich and tender, slow cooked lamb pie encased in crumbly pastry and topped with creamy, horseradish mash potato. The lamb and mint filling is easy to prepare and can be left to cook in the oven or slow cooker for a few hours. This delicious lamb pie recipe is made with a rich, full-flavoured, mint gravy and is a great twist on the classic shepherds pie.

A slice of lamb and mint pie with a pastry base and mash potato topping, served on a plate with tender stem broccoli.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This is one of those recipes that you can prepare in advance and then leave to slow cook in the oven whilst you enjoy your day. This incredible lamb pie will fill the house with the most amazing mint gravy aroma and will have you drooling at the oven whilst you wait for the lamb to melt down and the gravy to thicken up.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this Lamb pie recipe you will need:

Ingredients for making lamb pie recipe

Ingredient notes

See recipe card at the bottom for full recipe and ingredients quantities.

Pastry: For ease I've opted for shop bought short crust pastry. If you want to make your own, have a look at my Steak and Ale Pie for an easy shortcrust pastry recipe. For a gluten free version look for gluten free pastry. Double check labels of all ingredients for gluten.

Stock: The stock is the base of the gravy so choose a good quality beef stock. If you can't source any, an oxo cube dissolved in boiling water will do just fine.

Lamb: Leg or shoulder.

Red wine: For the best gravy use good quality red wine. If you would prefer to not add wine then leave it out and make up the quantity with extra beef stock.

Horseradish: Horseradish mash is a great flavour against the rich lamb filling, but its completely optional and just plain mash can be used if preferred.

Flour: The flour is used as a thickening agent. If you are making a gluten free version then opt for a gluten free thickener such as cornflour or potato starch. Double check labels of all ingredients for gluten.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Gently cook onions and garlic
  2. Dust diced lamb with flour, add to the pan and brown.
  3. Add the wine and deglaze the pan. Then gradually add the stock whilst stirring.
  4. Make a gravy paste by adding cold water to the gravy powder. Add the paste, ketchup, Worcestershire sauce and dried mint to the pan. Stir continuously over a gentle heat for 2-3 minutes, ensuring no lumps form.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Transfer to slow cooker (low for 6 hours) or ovenproof dish (150°C Fan/300°F for 4 hours).
  6. Place potatoes into a pan with boiling water and simmer for 45 minutes or until soft.
  7. Line a greased, 21cm (8 inch) pie dish with shortcrust pastry. Store in fridge until needed.
  8. Drain and mash up potatoes with milk, butter and horseradish. Then taste and season.  Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Strain cooked lamb filling through a sieve allowing the gravy to collect in a small pan.  Use a fork to break up and shred the lamb. 
  10. For best results blind bake the pastry. (For blind baking instructions follow link or see notes below). Gently spoon the shredded lamb into the blind baked pastry. Fill to half way up the pastry leaving plenty of room for the mash.
  11. Add the mash over the top of the filling (Piping the mash on is optional but will ensure an even layer of mash on top of your pie).
  12. Cook the pie in the oven at 180°C(Fan)/350°F for 40 minutes. Check after 30 minutes. Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 9-12.
  13. Remove the lamb pie from the oven and heat the pan of strained gravy. Plate up and serve with your choice of veg and hot mint gravy.

💭 Expert tips

  • Keep the pan reasonably hot when making the filling. This will allow the floured lamb to brown nicely and add to the flavour.
  • Bits of flour and meat that stick to the base of the pan will be easily removed when the wine is added (deglaze). Ensure the pan is hot and on the heat still.
  • If you are preparing the mash potatoes the day before, then transfer to a dish, cool and cover with cling film. Store in the fridge overnight. When ready to use, reheat until just warm in either a pan or the microwave. If the mash appears crumbly upon reheating then mash in more milk until smooth.
  • For an even mash topping, transfer the mash to a large pipping bag. Cut the end off to create a wide opening (1.5cm). Pipe balls of mash onto the top of the filling so it evenly covers the surface. Use a fork to pack down and bring the balls of mash together.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What cut of lamb is best for slow cooking?

The best lamb for this recipe is leg or shoulder. Both are great for slow cooking and will become fall apart, tender in the pan.

How do you cook lamb so its tender?

Tough cuts of lamb, such as leg and shoulder, need to be cooked long and slow for the meat to become tender. Cook for at least 2 hours on a low temperature (150°C Fan/300°F). If the meat is still tough cook for longer.

Do you cook shortcrust pastry before adding filling?

To prevent a soggy bottom its always best to blind bake a pastry, particular if you are adding a wet filling. To do this line the pie dish with the pastry then prick all over with a fork. Line the pastry with a scrunched up piece of baking paper. Weight down the paper with dried pasta/baking beans. Bake for 10 minutes at 200°C Fan/400°F, then remove paper and bake for a further 5 minutes.

Can I use rice to blind bake pastry?

Yes dried rice or pulses can be used when blind baking in place of baking beans. dried pasta also works well.

How to store?

The uncooked pie can be wrapped in cling film and either refrigerated for 2-3 days or frozen for up to 3 months. When ready to cook, thoroughly defrost or bring to room temperature. Cook as per the recipe.

Once the pie is cooked any leftovers can be stored in the fridge for 2-3 days. Just leave in the pie dish, ensure the pie is fully cooled and cover in cling film. To reheat, remove from the fridge and bring to room temperature then cover with foil and place in a hot oven for 20 minutes.

Slice of lamb pie with mash topping and pastry bottom, served with mint gravy poured over the top.

🍲 Other comfort food dinner recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A slice of lamb and mint pie with a pastry base and mash potato topping, served on a plate with tender stem broccoli.
Print

Lamb Pie Recipe

Rich and tender, slow cooked lamb pie encased in crumbly pastry and topped with creamy, horseradish mash potato. The lamb and mint filling is easy to prepare and can be left to cook in the oven or slow cooker for a few hours. This delicious lamb pie recipe is made with a rich, full-flavoured, mint gravy and is a great twist on the classic shepherds pie.
Course Dinner, main meal
Prep Time 1 hour
Cook Time 4 hours
Total Time 5 hours
Servings 4 people
Calories 668kcal

Equipment

  • Ovenproof dish or slow cooker
  • 21cm (8 inch) pie dish
  • rolling pin
  • Medium pan for potatoes
  • Masher
  • Small pan for the gravy
  • Large piping bag to pipe on mash (optional)

Ingredients

Lamb pie filling:

  • ½ tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 large onion roughly chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped or minced
  • 600 g diced leg of lamb or lamb shoulder
  • 3 tablespoon plain flour
  • 100 ml red wine
  • 450 ml good quality beef stock
  • 2 tablespoon ketchup
  • 2 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 2 teaspoon dried mint
  • 4 teaspoon gravy powder

Pastry base:

  • 375 g ready rolled short crust pastry

Potato topping:

  • 750 g potatoes peeled and roughly chopped
  • 4 tablespoon milk
  • 15 g Butter
  • 2 teaspoon horseradish sauce
  • Pinch salt to taste

Instructions

  • Place a large pan on medium heat and add the oil. Once the oil has heated add the chopped onions and garlic and cook gently until soft.
  • Lay out the lamb and dust evenly with flour. When the onions are soft add the floured lamb to the pan and cook until browned all over. The lamb and flour will stick and brown the base of the pan.
  • Next add the wine, which should bubble as it hits the pan and help release any brown flour. Then gradually add the stock and bring to a simmer. Stir frequently allowing the stock to thicken as it combines with the flour.
  • Next place the gravy powder in a small container or cup and stir in enough cold water to form a loose paste. Pour the gravy paste into the pan and stir continuously over a gentle heat for 2-3 minutes, ensuring no lumps form from the gravy powder. Then add the ketchup, Worcestershire sauce and dried mint. Mix well and then remove from the heat.
  • Transfer the entire contents of the pan to your slow cooker or ovenproof dish. Set the slow cooker to low and cook for 6 hours or cook in the oven for 4 hours at 150°C(Fan)/300°F. Once the cooking time is up the meat should fall apart easily. If not, return to the oven or slow cooker for another 30 minutes or until the meat is tender enough to fall apart.
  • Whilst the filling is in the oven peel place the peeled and chopped potatoes into a pan with boiling water and simmer for 45 minutes or until soft.
  • Meanwhile roll out the pastry so its big enough to cover the base and sides of your pie dish (this recipe uses a 21cm (8 inch) pie dish). Grease the pie dish with a bit of soft butter (use kitchen paper to spread evenly over the base) then dust flour over the butter using a sieve. Gently place the pastry over the pie dish (drape over a rolling pin for easier manoeuvring). Gently push the pastry into the corners of the dish (don't stretch), then use a knife to cut off any excess pastry from the edges. Place the pastry lined pie dish in the fridge until you’re ready to put the pie together.
  • When the potatoes are cooked, drain and mash up with the milk, butter and horseradish. Then taste and season. Let the potatoes cool slightly before transferring to a large piping bag, twist the open end of the bag and secure with a peg. Set to one side for later. If you don’t have a piping bag, then leave the mash in the pan and place the lid back on. Set to one side until later. NOTE: if you are preparing the mash potatoes the day before, then transfer to a dish, cover with cling film and store in the fridge overnight. When ready to use reheat until just warm in either a pan or the microwave. If the mash appears crumbly upon reheating then mash in more milk until smooth.
  • Once the lamb is cooked leave to cool slightly then strain through a sieve allowing the gravy to collect in a small pan. Strain in batches placing the meat in a dish as you go. Use a fork to break up and shred the lamb. At this point the strained lamb filling and the gravy can be covered and chilled in the fridge overnight or frozen for up to 3 months. Or add the lamb straight to the pie as per the below instructions.
  • Putting the pie together: Pre heat your oven to 180°C(Fan)/350°F. If your mash, filling and gravy are in the fridge or freezer make sure they have been left on the side with enough time to defrost/come up to room temperature. For best results blind bake the pastry. Gently spoon the shredded lamb into the blind baked pastry. Fill to half way up the pastry leaving plenty of room for the mash.
  • Then take your piping bag of mash and cut the end off to create a wide opening (1.5cm). Pipe balls of mash onto the top of the filling so it evenly covers the filling. Alternatively, spoon the mash over the filling. Use a fork to pack down and bring the balls of mash together. The fork will leave a nice ruffled pattern. (Piping is optional but will ensure a even layer of mash on top of your pie).
  • Place the pie in the centre of the pre heated and bake for 40 minutes. Check after 30 minutes to make sure the mash isn't burning. After the 40 minutes is up the mash should be golden brown and the filling should be just bubbling around the edges.
  • Remove from the oven and allow to cool for 5 minutes. Whilst cooling, return to your pan of drained off gravy. Mix well and then heat gently for 5 minutes. Plate up the pies and serve with your choice of veg and hot mint gravy.

Notes

Pastry: For ease this recipe uses shop bought short crust pastry. If you want to make your own, have a look at my Steak and Ale Pie for an easy shortcrust pastry recipe. For a gluten free version look for gluten free pastry. Double check labels of all ingredients for gluten.
What cut of lamb is best for slow cooking? The best lamb for this recipe is leg or shoulder. Both are great for slow cooking and will become fall apart, tender in the pan.
How do you cook lamb so its tender? Tough cuts of lamb, such as leg and shoulder, need to be cooked long and slow for the meat to become tender. Cook for at least 2 hours on a low temperature (150°C Fan/300°F). If the meat is still tough cook for longer.
Do you cook shortcrust pastry before adding filling? To prevent a soggy bottom its always best to blind bake a pastry, particular if you are adding a wet filling. To do this line the pie dish with the pastry then prick all over with a fork. Line the pastry with a scrunched up piece of baking paper. Weight down the paper with dried pasta/baking beans. Bake for 10 minutes at 200°C Fan (400°F), then remove paper and bake for a further 5 minutes.
Can I use rice to blind bake pastry? Yes dried rice or pulses can be used when blind baking in place of baking beans. dried pasta also works well.
How to store? The uncooked pie can be wrapped in cling film and either refrigerated for 2-3 days or frozen for up to 3 months. When ready to cook, thoroughly defrost or bring to room temperature. Cook as per the recipe.
Once the pie is cooked any leftovers can be stored in the fridge for 2-3 days. Just leave in the pie dish, ensure the pie is fully cooled and cover in cling film. To reheat, remove from the fridge and bring to room temperature then cover with foil and place in a hot oven for 20 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 668kcal | Carbohydrates: 96g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 66mg | Sodium: 974mg | Potassium: 1504mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 143IU | Vitamin C: 42mg | Calcium: 78mg | Iron: 7mg

This post was first published in May 2017. Updated in May 2021 with improved recipe and photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Lamb Pie Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/lamb-pies-minted-mash-potato-top/feed/ 20
Apple Crumble https://properfoodie.com/apple-crumble/ https://properfoodie.com/apple-crumble/#respond Mon, 15 Mar 2021 22:51:59 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11689 Apple crumble baked fresh at home with lashings of custard. - This is what Sundays are made for! This easy crumble recipe is made with crisp, Bramley apples tossed in cinnamon, then baked with a simple crumble and hazelnut topping. Ready in 30 minutes; from peeling the apples to pulling a bubbling, golden crumble out...

Read More

The post Apple Crumble appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Apple crumble baked fresh at home with lashings of custard. - This is what Sundays are made for! This easy crumble recipe is made with crisp, Bramley apples tossed in cinnamon, then baked with a simple crumble and hazelnut topping. Ready in 30 minutes; from peeling the apples to pulling a bubbling, golden crumble out of the oven.

A portion of apply crumble on a small plate with custard drizzled over and the rest of the crumble in a larger dish with a spoon.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This apple crumble recipe is traditional, homemade and one the easiest yet most satisfying desserts I know. With a simple method that requires only 30 minutes, this is a great dessert for when you have mouths to feed and time to save!

Theres no need for any fancy equipment and no special skills required to make it look good. Just layering the apples and then crumble into a baking dish and popping into the oven until bubbling. Super simple.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this traditional apple crumble recipe you will need:

  • 100g plain flour
  • 75g ground almonds
  • 100g golden caster sugar
  • 100g cold, cubed, unsalted butter
  • pinch of salt
  • 500g peeled and chopped cooking apples
  • 2 tablespoon Honey
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon (optional)
  • 25g roasted chopped hazelnuts (optional)

Ingredient notes

Ground almonds: These are used to give extra flavour to the crumble, However, if you would rather not use almonds then just replace with the same amount of plain flour. Meaning the total flour would be 175g.

Apples: Use cooking apples.

Cinnamon: This warming spice goes fantastically well with the stewed apples. But if you prefer you can leave this out or substitute with nutmeg or allspice.

Hazelnuts: Optional - leave out if you prefer. I like to use chopped hazelnuts to add to the crunch and the flavour of the topping.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan).
    Prepare the crumble: Add 100g plain flour, 75g ground almonds, 100g golden caster sugar, 100g cubed unsalted butter and a pinch of salt to a mixing bowl. Use your finger tips to rub the butter into the rest of the ingredients until like breadcrumbs. Then place to one side while you prepare the apples. 
  2. Peel the apples, remove the core and then cut the flesh into rough 1cm cubes. Transfer the cubed apple to a 21cm (8 inch) pie dish and then add 2 tablespoon honey and 1 teaspoon cinnamon. Mix together well until the apple is fully coated in the honey and cinnamon
  3. Next take the crumble mix and evenly scatter over the apple until the entire surface is covered. 
    For extra crunch sprinkle over some chopped hazelnuts (optional).
  4. Place the pie dish in the preheated oven and bake for 20 minutes or until the crumble is golden and the apple is bubbling.
    Serve with custard.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.

💭 Expert tips

  • Crumble topping: Crumble is usually a mixture of flour, butter and sugar. For this recipe I've also added ground almonds for extra flavour and chopped hazelnuts for extra crunch. However, both of these ingredients are optional. If you would prefer a nut-free option just replace the ground almonds with the same amount of flour and leave out the hazelnuts.
  • Filling: The filling in this recipe is a chunky filling. This means that the cubed apples hold their shape. For a smooth filling stew the apples before placing in the pie dish. To do this add the apples to a pan with butter and cook gently until soft. Mash up until smooth then transfer to the pie dish and add the crumble.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What apples are best for crumble?

Bramley cooking apples are the best option for using in a crumble. These deliciously, crisp, bright green apples are generally larger with a more sour taste than your standard eating apple. They are ideal for any kind of dessert as when baked they stew down almost immediately into a fluffy apple sauce perfect for using in crumbles, apple pies and apple turnovers.

Cooking apples are also a great option for making homemade apple sauce to go with your roast beef dinner

Can the crumble be made with oats?

Using oats instead of flour is a great alternative, especially if you want to make this recipe gluten free (do double check the label to ensure that the oats you use are completely gluten free). To make this recipe with oats simply replace the flour with same amount of oats.

Is apple crisp and apple crumble the same thing?

In the UK apple crisp and and crumble are the same thing and in fact the term apple crisp isn't generally used. In the US 'apple crisp' is a crumble made out of sugar and oats only, and 'apple crumble', is the same as the standard UK crumble made with butter, flour and sugar.

How to store?

Once baked and cooled the crumble should be covered and then stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can briefly reheat the crumble in either the oven or microwave.

Can you freeze apple crumble?

Apple crumble is best frozen before it has been baked. Once you have made up the crumble in a pie dish, wrap in cling film and then store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Throughly defrost in the fridge overnight before baking as instructed in this recipe.

Round baking dish filled with apple crumble and topped with chopped hazelnuts, and baking apples the background.

🍨 Other dessert recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A portion of apply crumble on a small plate with custard drizzled over and the rest of the crumble in a larger dish with a spoon.
Print

Apple Crumble

Apple crumble baked fresh at home with lashings of custard - this is what Sundays are made for! This easy apple crumble recipe is made with crisp Bramley apples tossed in cinnamon, then baked with a simple crumble and hazelnut topping. Ready in 30 minutes from peeling the apples to pulling a bubbling, golden apple crumble out of the oven.
Course Dessert, pudding
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 407kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • 21cm (8 inch) pie dish

Ingredients

  • 100 g plain flour
  • 75 g ground almonds
  • 100 g golden caster sugar
  • 100 g cold unsalted butter (cubed)
  • pinch of salt
  • 500 g peeled and chopped cooking apples
  • 2 tablespoon Honey
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
  • 25 g roasted chopped hazelnuts (optional)

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan). Prepare the crumble in a large mixing bowl. Add 100g plain flour, 75g ground almonds, 100g golden caster sugar, 100g cubed unsalted butter and a pinch of salt to the bowl.
  • Use your finger tips to rub the butter into the rest of the ingredients until like breadcrumbs. Then place to one side while you prepare the apples.
  • Peel the apples, remove the core and then cut the flesh into rough 1cm cubes. Transfer the cubed apple to a pie dish and then add 2 tablespoon honey and 1 teaspoon cinnamon. Mix together well until the apple is fully coated in the honey and cinnamon
  • Next take the crumble mix and evenly scatter over the apple until the entire surface is covered. For extra crunch sprinkle over some chopped hazelnuts (optional).
  • Place the pie dish in the preheated oven and bake for 20 minutes or until the crumble is golden and the apple is bubbling. Serve with custard.

Video

Notes

Can the crumble be made with oats? Apple crumble made with oats instead of flour is a great alternative if you want to make this recipe gluten free (do double check that the oats you use are completely gluten free and not packaged alongside wheat containing products). To make this recipe with oats simply replace the flour with same amount of oats.
How to store? Once baked and cooled the crumble should be covered and then stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can briefly reheat the crumble in either the oven or microwave.
Can apple crumble be frozen? Apple crumble is best frozen before it has been baked. Once you have made up the crumble in a pie dish, wrap in cling film and then store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Throughly defrost in the fridge overnight before baking as instructed in this recipe.
Expert tips:
  • Crumble topping: Crumble is usually a mixture of flour, butter and sugar. For this recipe I've also added ground almonds for extra flavour and chopped hazelnuts for extra crunch. However, both of these ingredients are optional. If you would prefer a nut-free option just replace the ground almonds with the same amount of flour and leave out the hazelnuts.
  • Filling: The filling in this recipe is a chunky filling. This means that the cubed apples hold their shape. For a smooth filling stew the apples before placing in the pie dish. To do this add the apples to a pan with butter and cook gently until soft. Mash up until smooth then transfer to the pie dish and add the crumble.

Nutrition

Serving: 155g | Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 145mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 32g | Vitamin A: 463IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in December 2019. Updated in March 2021 with expert tips.

The post Apple Crumble appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/apple-crumble/feed/ 0
Classic Fish Pie Recipe https://properfoodie.com/fish-pie-cheese-sauce-mash-topping/ https://properfoodie.com/fish-pie-cheese-sauce-mash-topping/#comments Mon, 01 Feb 2021 22:44:08 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6085 A warm and comforting classic fish pie recipe. Made with chunks of salmon, cod and smoked haddock cooked in a creamy sauce with crisp mash topping. A really easy pie recipe that can be rustled up in just over an hour. Great for any night of the week. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe When...

Read More

The post Classic Fish Pie Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A warm and comforting classic fish pie recipe. Made with chunks of salmon, cod and smoked haddock cooked in a creamy sauce with crisp mash topping. A really easy pie recipe that can be rustled up in just over an hour. Great for any night of the week.

Large shallow casserole dish containing mash topped classic fish pie, baked until crisp and golden brown.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

When its cold out, this classic fish pie recipe will warm you through and leave you ready to face the elements the next day. Its also a pretty good dish for a cosy Saturday night in. Lock out the cold and get this pie in the oven!! Simple, easy and delightful. The classic dishes are always the best.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this classic fish pie recipe at home you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make this classic fish pie recipe with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Diced fish: For this recipe I used a mixture of salmon, cod and smoked haddock. However, feel free to choose your preferred fish. Or even swap some of the fish for prawns. You may also find that your local fish monger or supermarket offers a ready diced fish pie selection. This may work out cheaper than buying separated pieces of fish.

Milk: Semi skimmed milk (2%) is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required for a smooth and silky sauce.

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour as the thickening agent for the sauce.

Cheese: The cheddar cheese is melted into the sauce before mixing in the fish. If preferred you can leave out the cheese and just use a white sauce. Alternatively, swap cheddar for a different cheese to create your preferred flavour.

Baby spinach: This is optional and can be left out if preferred or swapped for another green veg such as garden peas, asparagus or tenderstem broccoli.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Peel the potatoes and roughly chop into cubes. Add to a large pan, cover with water and cook on medium heat for around 40 minutes or until soft. Preheat the oven to 180°C.
  2. Meanwhile, take a medium pan and cook the onions and garlic in butter until soft.
  3. Add the flour and stir in, the mixture should clump slightly and turn to a paste.
  4. On low-medium heat, add around ⅕ of the milk to the onions and flour, stirring continuously until the mixture starts to thicken. See tip below.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this pie step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. As the mixture thickens add another helping of milk. Heat and stir until it thickens again and then continue until all the milk has been added.
  6. Next take the sauce off the heat and stir in the cheese.
  7. Add the chopped, raw fish to the cheese sauce and mix in carefully.
  8. Add the spinach leaves and stir in.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this pie recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Transfer the fish pie mix to an ovenproof dish
  10. Drain the cooked potatoes, add the milk and butter and mash. Spoon the mash potato over the top of the fish pie mix then use the back of a spoon to spread evenly to the edges of the dish.
  11. Use a fork to mark and ruffle up the surface of the mash potato.
  12. Place in the centre of a preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes. Serve with a scattering of freshly chopped parsley leaves.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this pie recipe step by step for instructions 9-12.

💭 Expert tips

Sauce: When making the fish pie sauce try to keep the heat on medium-low. Heating too quickly can curdle the mixture. If the mixture does start to curdle remove from the heat momentarily and stir rapidly.

Recipe suggestion: If you're after an extra indulgent twist, dot the mash with extra butter and grate over extra cheese before baking in the oven.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can you make this recipe ahead of time?

Make this recipe up to just before the pie goes into the oven. At this point the pie can be covered and stored in the fridge or freezer until you are ready to cook it. Note: If you intend to freeze the uncooked pie make sure the fish is as fresh as possible and suitable for freezing.

When you are ready to cook, remove from the fridge and leave on the side for a hour or so to bring to room temperature. Or defrost overnight. Then cook in the oven as per the recipe instructions.

What if my fish has skin on?

If you choose to buy whole fillets of fish for this recipe then you may find that your fillets have skin on. Skinning a fish is quite easy if you use the right method and knife. The best knife to use is a sharp, flexible fish knife.

Place the fish on a board skin side down. To remove the skin use the knife with the blade facing away from you. slightly peel back the skin from one corner, then place the blade between the fish and its skin and hold onto the skin with your other hand. Keep the skin and the side of the blade flat to the board and work along the fillet with the knife. Press the side off the blade downwards into the board as well as moving it across.2 images showing how to remove the skin from a fillet of salmon

What to serve with fish pie?

Green vegetables, like green bean almondine, broccoli or peas make the perfect accompaniment to this creamy fish pie. However, if you were to make this fish pie with a pastry topping you could add a side of mash potato, Foil Pack Potatoes or even honey glazed carrots and parsnips.

For a dessert how about homemade Bakewell tart or for something lighter a loaf of freshly baked banana bread.

Can you reheat this recipe once cooked?

Although the fish pie will never be as good as the day you make it fresh, you can safely store and reheat it. Note that this is assumed that the fish you use is as fresh as possible. Make sure your fish pie is fully cooled before covering and storing in the fridge for up to 3 days. To to reheat place in an oven proof dish, cover with foil and warm in the oven for 25 minutes. Remove the foil for the last 5 minutes and check its piping hot throughout. Alternatively, transfer to a microwavable container and microwave on high for 4-5 minutes until piping hot throughout,

Can you freeze leftover fish pie?

Make sure the fish pie is fully cooled then transfer to a sealed container and freeze for up to 3 months. To reheat simply remove the fish pie from the freezer and completely defrost before cooking in the oven for 30 minutes at 180 degrees C.  You should cover the pie with foil to prevent the top from crisping up too much as you are cooking it a second time.  Remove the foil for the last 5 minutes to finish, check the pie is hot throughout and enjoy.

Oblong baking dish containing classic fish pie recipe with a mash potato topping that has been marked with a fork and baked until crisp.

🦐 Other fish recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Large shallow casserole dish containing mash topped classic fish pie, baked until crisp and golden brown.
Print

Classic Fish Pie Recipe

A warm and comforting classic fish pie recipe. Made with chunks of salmon, cod and smoked haddock in a creamy sauce with crisp mash topping. A really easy pie recipe that can be rustled up in just over an hour. Great for any night of the week.
Course Dinner
Cuisine British
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 562kcal

Equipment

  • Flexible fish knife for skinning fish (if necessary)
  • Large pan for potatoes
  • Medium pan for filling
  • Masher
  • Large ovenproof dish

Ingredients

For the mash topping

  • 1 kg potatoes
  • 20 g butter
  • Splash of milk

For the filling

  • 20 g butter
  • 1 onion finely chopped
  • 1 garlic clove finely chopped
  • 30 g plain flour
  • 400 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 50 g cheddar cheese
  • 280 g cod cut into bite size chunks
  • 140 g smoked haddock cut into bite size chunks
  • 140 g salmon cut into bite size chunks
  • 50 g baby spinach leaves

Instructions

  • Peel the potatoes and roughly chop into cubes. Add to a large pan, cover with water and cook on medium heat for around 40 minutes or until soft. Preheat the oven to 180°C.
  • Meanwhile, take a medium pan and cook the onions and garlic in butter until soft.
  • Add the flour and stir in, the mixture should clump slightly and turn to a paste.
  • On low-medium heat, add around ⅕ of the milk to the onions and flour, stirring continuously until the mixture starts to thicken. See tip below.
  • As the mixture thickens add another helping of milk. Heat and stir until it thickens again and then continue until all the milk has been added.
  • Next take the sauce off the heat and stir in the cheese.
  • Add the chopped, raw fish to the cheese sauce and mix in carefully.
  • Add the spinach leaves and stir in.
  • Transfer the fish pie mix to an ovenproof dish
  • Drain the cooked potatoes, add the milk and butter and mash. Spoon the mash potato over the top of the fish pie mix then use the back of a spoon to spread evenly to the edges of the dish.
  • Use a fork to mark and ruffle up the surface of the mash potato.
  • Place in the centre of a preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes. Serve with a scattering of freshly chopped parsley leaves.

Notes

Sauce tip: When making the fish pie sauce try to keep the heat on medium-low. Heating too quickly can curdle the mixture. If the mixture does start to curdle remove from the heat momentarily and stir rapidly.
Recipe suggestion: If you're after an extra indulgent twist, dot the mash with extra butter and grate over extra cheese before baking in the oven.
Can you make this recipe ahead of time? Make this recipe up to just before the pie goes into the oven. At this point the pie can be covered and stored in the fridge or freezer until you are ready to cook it. Note: If you intend to freeze the uncooked pie make sure the fish is as fresh as possible and suitable for freezing. When you are ready to cook, remove from the fridge and leave on the side for a hour or so to bring to room temperature. Or defrost overnight. Then cook in the oven as per the recipe instructions.
What if my fish has skin on? If you choose to buy whole fillets of fish for this recipe then you may find that your fillets have skin on. Skinning a fish is quite easy if you use the right method and knife. The best knife to use is a sharp, flexible fish knife. Place the fish on a board skin side down. To remove the skin use the knife with the blade facing away from you. slightly peel back the skin from one corner, then place the blade between the fish and its skin and hold onto the skin with your other hand. Keep the skin and the side of the blade flat to the board and work along the fillet with the knife. Press the side off the blade downwards into the board as well as moving it across.2 images showing how to remove the skin from a fillet of salmon
Can you freeze leftover fish pie? Make sure the fish pie is fully cooled then transfer to a sealed container and freeze for up to 3 months. To reheat simply remove the fish pie from the freezer and completely defrost before cooking in the oven for 30 minutes at 180 degrees C.  You should cover the pie with foil to prevent the top from crisping up too much as you are cooking it a second time.  Remove the foil for the last 5 minutes to finish, check the pie is hot throughout and enjoy. 


Nutrition

Serving: 0.25pie | Calories: 562kcal | Carbohydrates: 59g | Protein: 42g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 119mg | Sodium: 545mg | Potassium: 1955mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1733IU | Vitamin C: 57mg | Calcium: 304mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Classic Fish Pie Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fish-pie-cheese-sauce-mash-topping/feed/ 7
American Blueberry Pancakes https://properfoodie.com/blueberry-pancakes/ https://properfoodie.com/blueberry-pancakes/#respond Sun, 17 Jan 2021 00:51:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9304 American blueberry pancakes recipe topped with melted butter and thick golden syrup.  Make your own deliciously light and fluffy Blueberry Pancakes with this easy step by step guide. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for pancake...

Read More

The post American Blueberry Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

American blueberry pancakes recipe topped with melted butter and thick golden syrup.  Make your own deliciously light and fluffy Blueberry Pancakes with this easy step by step guide. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for pancake day with an extra special blueberry twist. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

Stack of American style blueberry pancakes with a piece of butter on top and syrup being poured over

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Theres nothing half-hearted about these American blueberry pancakes. Everything from whipped egg whites and Greek yogurt to sticky syrup and juicy blueberries has been used. The results speak for themselves and whats more this recipe is super easy.

Wet and dry ingredients are simply whisked together in a bowl and for extra fluffiness the egg whites are separated and then whipped and folded into the mixture last. If you are looking for pancakes that are soft and spongy with blueberries that pop with juice as you bite into them, then this is your recipe.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this Blueberry Pancakes recipe you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make Blueberry American style pancakes with text overlay stating each ingredients

Ingredient notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.

Baking powder: Blueberry pancakes use a rising agent to make them thick and fluffy.

Eggs: This recipe suggests to separate the eggs. The yolks are added in with the other wet ingredients, whilst the whites are whipped up into soft peaks and folded in separately at the end. This helps to create extra fluffy pancakes.

However, if you are happy to forgo extra fluffiness in favour of ease and time, you can just add whole eggs along with the other wet ingredients. The pancakes will still be fluffy due to the baking powder.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.

Yogurt: The acid in the yogurt helps to activate the baking powder so lifting the pancakes. If preferred this can be substituted with buttermilk, which will have the same affect.

Blueberries: Substitute with other berries if preferred such as raspberries or blackberries. Or try with chunks of mango or banana.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. In a large bowl mix together the flour, caster sugar and baking powder.
  2. In a smaller bowl separate the two egg yolks and whisk together (place the whites to one side for later).
  3. Next add the yogurt and milk to the yolks.
  4. Whisk together well until smooth and fully combined.
    A collage of 4 images showing how to make the pancakes step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients and pour in the combined yolks, yogurt and milk.
  6. Whisk everything together into a thick batter.
  7. In a separate smaller bowl whisk the egg whites until soft white peaks form.
  8. Gently fold the egg whites into the pancake mixture.A collage of 4 images showing how to make the pancakes step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Finally add the blueberries to the batter.
  10. Fold in gently ensuring the 'fluffiness' from the egg whites is maintained.
  11. Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a medium heat scoop 1 ladle full of pancake mix into the centre of the pan and cook for a minute or so.
  12. Flip the pancake when bubbles start forming on the top of the batter and cook for a further minute on the second side.A collage of 4 images showing how to make the pancakes step by step for instructions 9-12.
  13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

💭 Expert tips

  • For a simpler version, leave out the blueberries and make standard American Pancakes.
  • Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine, then carefully and gently fold in the egg whites and blueberries.
  • If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter to the pan and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do I make pancakes fluffy?

American blueberry pancakes are made fluffy by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.

What is the difference between British and American pancakes?

Unlike British pancakes, American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than British pancakes.

What to serve with pancakes?

The most simple topping for blueberry pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey.

Other toppings you may want to use could include other types of berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, chocolate sauce, toffee sauce, lemon curd, nuts and seeds.

How do you know when to flip the pancakes?

The indication that its time to flip your pancake is when bubbles begin to appear on the surface of the batter. However, if your pan isn't hot enough the bubbles may not form and the pancake won't cook properly.

More often than not the first pancake is made before the pan is up to temperature and tends not to work out. This is why its often said that the first pancake should be thrown away. However, with patience theres no need for any waste 🙂

Stack of blueberry pancakes with butter melting on the top and a small glass jug of syrup in the background

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

🍌 Other fruity desserts

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Stack of American style blueberry pancakes with a piece of butter on top and syrup being poured over
Print

American Blueberry Pancakes

American blueberry pancakes recipe topped with melted butter and thick golden syrup.  Make your own deliciously light and fluffy Blueberry Pancakes with this easy step by step recipe. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for pancake day with an extra special blueberry twist.
Course Breakfast, Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 pancakes
Calories 117kcal

Ingredients

  • 150 g plain flour
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 tablespoon caster sugar
  • 2 large eggs (yolks and whites separated)
  • 250 ml Greek yogurt
  • 25 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 100 g blueberries (plus extra for serving)
  • Knob of butter for cooking

Instructions

  • In a large bowl mix together the flour, caster sugar and baking powder.
  • In a smaller bowl separate the two egg yolks and whisk together (place the whites to one side for later).
  • Next add the yogurt and milk to the yolks.
  • Whisk together well until smooth and fully combined.
  • Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients and pour in the combined yolks, yogurt and milk.
  • Whisk everything together into a thick batter.
  • In a separate smaller bowl whisk the egg whites until soft white peaks form.
  • Gently fold the egg whites into the pancake mixture.
  • Finally add the blueberries to the batter.
  • Fold in gently ensuring the 'fluffiness' from the egg whites is maintained.
  • Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a medium heat scoop 1 ladle full of pancake mix into the centre of the pan and cook for a minute or so.
  • Flip the pancake when bubbles start forming on the top of the batter and cook for a further minute on the second side.
  • Repeat steps 11 and 12 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

Notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour. Baking powder: American pancakes use a rising agent to make them thick and fluffy.
Eggs: If you want to save time and don’t mind about making your pancakes extra fluffy you can add eggs whole, along with the other wet ingredients, rather than separate.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.
Yogurt: The acid in the yogurt helps to activate the baking powder so lifting the pancakes. If preferred this can be substituted with buttermilk, which will have the same affect.
Blueberries: Substitute with other berries if preferred such as raspberries or blackberries. Or try with chunks of mango or banana.
Expert tip 1: Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine, then carefully and gently fold in the egg whites and blueberries.
Expert tip 2: If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter to the pan and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.
How do I make pancakes fluffy? American blueberry pancakes are made fluffy by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.
What to serve with pancakes? The most simple topping for blueberry pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey. Other toppings you may want to use could include other types of berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, chocolate sauce, toffee sauce, lemon curd, nuts and seeds.
How do you know when to flip the pancakes? The indication that its time to flip your pancake is when bubbles begin to appear on the surface of the batter. However, if your pan isn't hot enough the bubbles may not form and the pancake won't cook properly. More often than not the first pancake is made before the pan is up to temperature and tends not to work out. This is why its often said that the first pancake should be thrown away. However, with patience theres no need for any waste 🙂

Nutrition

Serving: 240g | Calories: 117kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 82mg | Potassium: 89mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 66IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in March 2019. Updated in January 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post American Blueberry Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/blueberry-pancakes/feed/ 0
Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones) https://properfoodie.com/scotch-pancakes-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/scotch-pancakes-recipe/#respond Sat, 30 Jan 2021 19:49:06 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16955 Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg. These soft and delightful scotch pancakes (or drop scones) are a perfect sweet treat for breakfast or afternoon tea. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy hot, buttery scotch pancakes every day of...

Read More

The post Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg. These soft and delightful scotch pancakes (or drop scones) are a perfect sweet treat for breakfast or afternoon tea. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy hot, buttery scotch pancakes every day of the week. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top and honey being drizzled over with a wooden honey dipper.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

These soft and sweet scotch pancakes are perfect for breakfast, hot and dripping with butter. Make up a batch at the start of the week and then pop a couple in the toaster to warm for your breakfast each day. This recipe is really easy and requires just 5 minutes to whisk together the batter.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this Scotch pancakes recipe at home you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make Scotch pancakes recipe with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Milk: Semi skimmed milk (2%) is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required to keep the pancakes soft and full of flavour.

Flour: This recipe uses UK self raising flour, which is different to the USA version. If you don't have this type of flour, it can be substituted for: 250g (2 cups) of all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder. For more info see this article on how to make self raising flour.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess.

Caster Sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the pancakes sweet. Caster sugar is the best option as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the scotch pancakes. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by sifting flour and sugar into a large mixing bowl.
  2. Make a well in the flour mix and crack in 1 large egg.
  3. Add half of the milk then start to whisk the milk and egg into the flour.
  4. Slowly start to add more of the milk to the batter, whisking well between each addition. The gradual addition will ensure a lump free batter.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Add enough milk until the batter is the consistency of thick pouring cream.
  6. Place a frying pan on a medium heat. Add a bit of butter and melt. Spread the butter around the pan using kitchen towel and remove any excess. Give your batter a good mix and then scoop ½ of a ladleful of pancake mix into the pan.
  7. Cook for a minute or so, until bubbles start forming on top of the batter.
  8. Flip the pancake and cook for a further minute on the second side.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra flavour and texture mix fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine.
  • If your pancakes are browning too much or are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is the difference between Scotch and American pancakes?

Scotch pancakes, also known as drop scones, are made with self raising flour which does a similar job to the baking powder in American pancakes. Therefore, scotch and American pancakes are very similar, the only real difference being that the scotch pancakes recipe includes caster sugar. So scotch pancakes are sweeter and primed for salty, melted butter.

What toppings to serve with pancakes?

The most simple topping for scotch pancakes is butter. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Honey can also be added, but this isn't strictly necessary as scotch pancakes are already sweet.

Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Can you reheat pancakes?

In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively, you can pop the pancakes in a toaster briefly or pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.

A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top ad a small dish on honey in the background.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top and honey being drizzled over with a wooden honey dipper.
Print

Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones)

Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg. These soft and delightful scotch pancakes (or drop scones) are a perfect sweet treat for breakfast or afternoon tea. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy hot, buttery scotch pancakes every day of the week.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch
Cuisine British
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 12 pancakes
Calories 96kcal

Equipment

  • Sieve
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • Frying pan
  • Ladle
  • Spatula

Ingredients

  • 225 g self raising flour
  • 40 g caster sugar
  • 1 egg
  • 250 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Butter for cooking

Instructions

  • Start by sifting flour and sugar into a large mixing bowl.
  • Make a well in the flour mix and crack in 1 large egg.
  • Add half of the milk then start to whisk the milk and egg into the flour.
  • Slowly start to add more of the milk to the batter, whisking well between each addition. The gradual addition will ensure a lump free batter.
  • Add enough milk until the batter is the consistency of thick pouring cream.
  • Place a frying pan on a medium heat. Add a bit of butter and melt. Spread the butter around the pan using kitchen towel and remove any excess. Give your batter a good mix and then scoop ½ of a ladleful of pancake mix into the pan.
  • Cook for a minute or so, until bubbles start forming on top of the batter.
  • Flip the pancake and cook for a further minute on the second side.
  • Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

Notes

Milk: Semi skimmed milk (2%) is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required to keep the pancakes soft and full of flavour.
Flour: This recipe uses UK self raising flour, which is different to the USA version. If you don't have this type of flour, it can be substituted for: 250g (2 cups) of all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder. For more info see this article on how to make self raising flour.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.
Caster Sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the pancakes sweet. Caster sugar is the best option as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the scotch pancakes. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.
Why are my pancakes browning too much? If your pancakes are browning too much or are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.
Can you reheat pancakes? In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively, you can pop the pancakes in a toaster briefly or pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.
What toppings to serve with pancakes? The most simple topping for scotch pancakes is butter. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Honey can also be added, but this isn't strictly necessary as scotch pancakes are already sweet. Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Nutrition

Serving: 1pancake | Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 15mg | Potassium: 53mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 41IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 30mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/scotch-pancakes-recipe/feed/ 0
English Pancakes Recipe https://properfoodie.com/english-pancakes-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/english-pancakes-recipe/#comments Fri, 29 Jan 2021 15:46:25 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16888 Traditional English pancakes recipe made simply with eggs, flour and milk. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy perfectly thin and light, English style pancakes on Pancake day. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe In the UK, English pancakes...

Read More

The post English Pancakes Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Traditional English pancakes recipe made simply with eggs, flour and milk. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy perfectly thin and light, English style pancakes on Pancake day. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A plate of this flat pancakes stacked with the top four folded twice topped with a lemon wedge and a second wedge being squeezed over the top.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

In the UK, English pancakes are traditionally eaten on Shrove Tuesday at the start of lent. A tradition we all love, although pancake making can be seen as quite a tricky business. How to make the batter, how to make thin pancakes, how to stop pancakes sticking to the pan, how to toss without disaster......it can all be quite stressful.

Fear not, this recipe is all about making the most perfect English pancakes in the easiest way possible. No lumpy batter and no pancakes on the ceiling (or floor). This recipe ensures a super smooth batter in just 5 minutes and although flipping pancakes is all part of the fun, its definitely not required here.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making these British pancakes:

  • Sieve
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • 9 inch pancake pan or frying pan
  • Ladle
  • Spatula

🥘 Ingredients

To make this English pancakes recipe at home you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make English pancakes recipe with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Milk: Semi skimmed milk (2%) is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required to keep the pancakes soft and full of flavour.

Flour: This recipe calls for plain or all purpose flour as the English pancake is thin and flat so doesn't require any rising agents.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.

Lemons and sugar: Lemon juice and sugar is the traditional topping for English pancakes. But feel free to substitute with your favourite pancake topping.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by sifting flour into a large mixing bowl.
  2. Make a well in the flour and crack in two eggs.
  3. Add a quarter of the milk to the eggs then start to whisk into the flour.
  4. Gradually add the rest of the milk to the batter and whisk well between each addition. The gradual addition will ensure a lump free batter.A collage of 4 images showing how to make English pancakes step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Once all the milk is whisked in, leave to stand for 30 minutes
  6. Place a 9 inch pancake pan or frying pan on a medium heat. Add a bit of butter and melt. Use kitchen towel to spread the batter around the pan base remove any excess. Give your batter a good mix and then scoop ¾ of a ladleful into the hot pan.
  7. Move the pan around to spread the batter all the way to the edges. (TIP: if you like frilly edges then take the batter ever so slightly up the sides of the pan).
  8. Keep the pan on a medium heat and cook for around 1 minute. Use a spatula to gently lift one side to check the pancake has browned and to help release it from the pan base. Its time to flip when you can shake the pan and the pancake slides and moves across the pan. Then, either take a chance and give it a flip or use a spatula to gently turn over the pancake.A collage of 4 images showing how to make English pancakes step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Cook on the second side for 30 seconds or so. Serve on a plate with lemon and sugar or transfer to foil and wrap to keep warm whilst you make more.
  10. Repeat steps 6-9 until all the batter is used up.

💭 Expert tips

  • As this is an English pancake recipe the batter should be thin and similar to the consistency of single cream.
  • Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine, then leave to rest for 30 minutes.
  • If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is the difference between English and American pancakes?

Unlike English pancakes, American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than English pancakes.

What is the difference between English pancakes and crepes?

The french version of pancakes are very similar to British pancakes except they are larger and thinner. A special tool is used for spreading the batter on a hot plate, which makes crepes very thin.

What topping to serve with pancakes?

The traditional topping for English pancakes is sugar and lemon - nice and simple. However, you could also top with strawberries, mango, banana, nutella, honey, syrup, chocolate sauce, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Can you reheat pancakes?

In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. This was always the tradition in my house. My mum would stand dutifully by the stove cooking off pancakes as fast as we could eat them.

However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.

Plate of thin, flat English pancakes viewed from above with the top 4 folded into quarters ad 2 lemon wedges placed on top.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A plate of this flat pancakes stacked with the top four folded twice topped with a lemon wedge and a second wedge being squeezed over the top.
Print

English Pancakes Recipe

Traditional English pancakes recipe made simply with eggs, flour and milk. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy perfectly thin and light English style pancakes on Pancake day.
Course Breakfast, brunch, Dessert
Cuisine British, English
Prep Time 35 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 Pancakes
Calories 111kcal

Equipment

  • Sieve
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • 9 inch pancake pan or frying pan
  • Ladle
  • Spatula

Ingredients

  • 110 g plain flour all purpose flour
  • 2 large eggs
  • 275 ml semi skimmed 2% milk
  • Knob of butter for cooking
  • Lemon juice and sugar for topping

Instructions

  • Start by sifting flour into a large mixing bowl.
  • Make a well in the flour and crack in two eggs.
  • Add a quarter of the milk to the eggs then start to whisk into the flour.
  • Gradually add the rest of the milk to the batter and whisk well between each addition. The gradual addition will ensure a lump free batter.
  • Once all the milk is whisked in, leave to stand for 30 minutes
  • Place a 9 inch pancake pan or frying pan on a medium heat. Add a bit of butter and melt. Use kitchen towel to spread the batter around the base of the pan and remove any excess. Give your batter a good mix and then scoop ¾ of a ladleful into the hot pan.
  • Move the pan around to spread the batter all the way to the edges. (TIP: if you like frilly edges then take the batter ever so slightly up the sides of the pan).
  • Keep the pan on a medium heat and cook for around 1 minute. Use a spatula to gently lift one side to check the pancake has browned and to help release it from the pan base. Its time to flip when you can shake the pan and the pancake slides and moves across the pan. Then, either take a chance and give it a flip or use a spatula to gently turn over the pancake.
  • Cook on the second side for 30 seconds or so. Serve on a plate with lemon and sugar or transfer to foil and wrap to keep warm whilst you make more.
  • Repeat steps 6-9 until all the batter is used up.

Notes

Milk: Semi skimmed milk is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required to keep the pancakes soft and full of flavour.
Flour: This recipe calls for plain or all purpose flour as the English pancake is thin and flat so doesn't require any rising agents.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.
Lemons and sugar: Lemon juice and sugar is the traditional topping for English pancakes. But feel free to substitute with your favourite pancake topping.
What is the difference between English and American pancakes?
Unlike English pancakes, American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than English pancakes.
What is the difference between English pancakes and crepes?
The french version of pancakes are very similar to British pancakes except they are larger and thinner. A special tool is used for spreading the batter on a hot plate, which makes crepes very thin.
What toppings to serve with pancakes?
The traditional topping for English pancakes is sugar and lemon - nice and simple. However, you could also top with strawberries, mango, banana, nutella, honey, syrup, chocolate sauce, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.
Can you reheat pancakes?
In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan and this was always the tradition in my house. My mum would stand dutifully by the stove cooking off pancakes as fast as we could eat them.
However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.

Nutrition

Serving: 1pancake | Calories: 111kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 58mg | Sodium: 43mg | Potassium: 104mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 126IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 1mg

The post English Pancakes Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/english-pancakes-recipe/feed/ 2
Hot Cross Buns Recipe https://properfoodie.com/hot-cross-buns-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/hot-cross-buns-recipe/#comments Mon, 25 Jan 2021 16:08:13 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16850 Warm and sticky hot cross buns fresh out of the oven. Make your own hot cross buns this Easter with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with juicy sultanas and sweet spices, they are perfect...

Read More

The post Hot Cross Buns Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Warm and sticky hot cross buns fresh out of the oven. Make your own hot cross buns this Easter with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with juicy sultanas and sweet spices, they are perfect for snacking on after a long walk on Easter Sunday.

Hot cross buns on a cooling rack with one sliced in half

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Making hot cross buns can be a fairly complex and daunting process. There are a number of steps involved but at the heart, its just a basic bread rolls recipe, and these rustic hot cross buns are actually really easy to make. With a foolproof method and 10 minute dough recipe these soft and fluffy buns will easily take centre stage this Easter.

You don't need a bread machine and theres no need to activate the yeast before adding it to the flour. This is a simple method of adding wet ingredients to dry and bringing it all together into the most perfect batch of homemade hot cross buns.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making this hot cross buns recipe:

  • Large flat baking tray lined with greaseproof paper
  • Piping bag for piping on the crosses.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this hot cross buns recipe at home you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make hot cross buns with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Flour: Strong bread flour (or just bread flour if you are in the US) contains a higher amount of protein, which will allow for more air to be trapped when the dough rises and bakes. Therefore, producing a light, soft and fluffy hot cross bun.

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.

Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.

Sultanas: Any dried fruit will work well in this recipe. Try with currants, raisins, dried cranberries, dried apricot pieces, orange peel or chocolate chips.

Mixed spice: This is a mixture of several sweet spices, including cinnamon, nutmeg and ginger. If you can't get hold of any mixed spice then you can use a mix of the above single spices.

Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the milk and butter in a small pan and heat gently until the butter has melted. Set to one side to cool.
  2. Next, in large bowl mix together the flour, sugar, yeast, salt and mixed spice (dry ingredients).
  3. Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients. Whisk the 2 eggs and pour into the well along with a quarter of the heated milk mixture. Stir well.
  4. Gradually add the rest of the milk mixture stirring between each addition to bring together into a dough.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Turn out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 5 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky. 
  6. Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  7. Knock back the risen dough and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the roughly with your fingertips.
  8. Grab the dough on either side with both hands and stretch out into a long strip. Add the sultanas to the centre of the strip of dough. A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Roll up into a sausage shape from one side to the other. This should allow for the fruit to be fully combined.
  10. Next, halve and then quarter the dough. Then halve each quarter, creating 8 pieces that will be similar in size. Shape each piece into a round ball. Then place on a lined baking tray. Space out well to leave room for rising in the oven. Cover lightly with cling film and leave in a warm place to rise for 30 minutes. At this point you can preheat the oven to 160°C (320°F).
  11. Whilst waiting for the second rise, make the paste for the crosses by mixing together 100g plain flour with 8 tablespoon whole milk. Transfer to a piping bag ready to pipe the crosses onto the buns.
  12. After 30 minutes remove the cling film from the dough balls. Whisk 1 egg with 1 tablespoon of whole milk and use a pastry brush to glaze the dough balls all over. A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 9-12.
  13. Pipe crosses over the glazed buns then place in the centre of a pre heated oven and bake at 160°C (320°F) for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.
  14. Remove the baked hot cross buns from the oven. Heat up some apricot jam and paint over the buns whilst still hot.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 13-14.

💭 Expert tips

  • Time yourself when kneading and make sure you knead for the full 5 minutes.
  • Only allow the dough to rise until it has about doubled in size. In a warm kitchen this should take around an hour. If you leave it for longer the gas bubbles can become too big and the buns will then fail to rise when baked.
  • If your kitchen is quite cool the dough could take up to 2 hours to double in size. You can speed this up by standing on top of a pre heated oven. Alternatively place the dough in the fridge if you would prefer to leave it to prove over a few hours instead (e.g. overnight).
  • When making the paste for the crosses, add the milk a bit at a time in order to reach your desired consistency. A thicker paste will give a thiner and more defined cross. A thinner paste will create a wider and flatter cross.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should hot cross buns be stored?

Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The buns will keep well and stay soft for 2-3 days, after this you may find that they start to harden and go stale.

Can this recipe be made in advance?

Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the dough is rolled into 8 balls. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The dough balls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Arrange on a tray, well spaced, then glaze with egg wash and pipe on the crosses before baking in the oven as per the recipe.

Can this recipe be reheated?

As these are HOT cross buns, it is nice to actually eat them whilst still warm. Once cooled you can reheat by wrapping the buns in foil, then place in a hot oven and warm gently for 5 minutes.

Can you freeze hot cross buns?

Once baked and fully cooled, place the buns in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months.

When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and either heat each bun for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then wrap in foil and pop in a hot oven to warm for 5 minutes.

three homemade hot cross buns on a cooli rack with a small dish of sultanas in the background

Other Easter bakes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

hot cross buns on a cooling rack with one sliced in half
Print

Hot Cross Buns Recipe

Warm and sticky hot cross buns fresh out of the oven. Make your own hot cross buns this Easter with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with juicy sultanas and sweet spices, they are perfect for snacking on after a long walk on Easter Sunday.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch, Dessert, Snack
Cuisine British, Easter
Prep Time 2 hours 35 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 3 hours
Servings 8 Hot cross buns
Calories 483kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Small saucepan
  • Small mixing bowl or jug
  • Large flat baking tray lined with greaseproof paper
  • Pastry brush
  • Piping bag for piping on the crosses

Ingredients

For the buns

  • 200 ml whole milk
  • 100 g unsalted butter
  • 2 large eggs beaten
  • 500 g strong white bread flour
  • 50 g caster sugar
  • 7 g sachet of fast action yeast
  • Pinch salt
  • 2 teaspoon mixed spice
  • 150 g Sultanas

For the cross

  • 100 g plain flour
  • 8 tablespoon whole milk

For the egg wash

  • 1 egg beaten
  • ½ tbsp. whole milk

For the glaze

  • 150 g Apricot jam

Instructions

  • Place the milk and butter in a small pan and heat gently until the butter has melted. Set to one side to cool.
  • Next, in large bowl mix together the flour, sugar, yeast, salt and mixed spice (dry ingredients).
  • Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients. Whisk the 2 eggs and pour into the well along with a quarter of the heated milk mixture. Stir well.
  • Gradually add the rest of the milk mixture stirring between each addition to bring together into a dough.
  • Turn out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 5 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky.
  • Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  • Knock back the risen dough and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out roughly with your fingertips.
  • Grab the dough on either side with both hands and stretch out into a long strip. Add the sultanas to the centre of the strip of dough.
  • Roll up into a sausage shape from one side to the other. This should allow for the fruit to be fully combined.
  • Next, halve and then quarter the dough. Then halve each quarter, creating 8 pieces that will be similar in size. Shape each piece into a round ball. Then place on a lined baking tray. Space out well to leave room for rising in the oven. Cover lightly with cling film and leave in a warm place to rise for 30 minutes. At this point you can preheat the oven to 160°C (320°F).
  • Whilst waiting for the second rise, make the paste for the crosses by mixing together 100g plain flour with 8 tablespoon whole milk. Transfer to a piping bag ready to pipe the crosses onto the buns.
  • After 30 minutes remove the cling film from the dough balls. Whisk 1 egg with 1 tablespoon of whole milk and use a pastry brush to glaze the dough balls all over.
  • Pipe crosses over the glazed dough balls then place in the centre of a pre heated oven and bake at 160°C (320°F) for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Remove the baked hot cross buns from the oven. Heat up some apricot jam and paint over the buns whilst still hot.

Notes

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.
Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.
Sultanas: Any dried fruit will work well in this recipe. Try with currants, raisins, dried cranberries, dried apricot pieces, orange peel or chocolate chips.
Mixed spice: This is a mixture of several sweet spices, including cinnamon, nutmeg and ginger. If you can't get hold of any mixed spice then you can use a mix of the above single spices.
Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the dough to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.
How should hot cross buns be stored? Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The buns will keep well and stay soft for 2-3 days, after this you may find that they start to harden and go stale.
Can this recipe be made in advance? Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the dough is rolled into 8 balls. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The dough balls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Arrange on a tray, well spaced, then glaze with egg wash and pipe on the crosses before baking in the oven as per the recipe.
Can this recipe be reheated? As these are HOT cross buns, it is nice to actually eat them whilst still warm. Once cooled you can reheat by wrapping the buns in foil, then place in a hot oven and warm gently for 5 minutes.
Can you freeze hot cross buns? Once baked and fully cooled, place the buns in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and either heat each bun for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then wrap in foil and pop in a hot oven to warm for 5 minutes.
Expert tips:
  • Time yourself when kneading and make sure you knead for the full 5 minutes.
  • Only allow the dough to rise until it has about doubled in size. In a warm kitchen this should take around an hour. If you leave it for longer the gas bubbles can become too big and the dough will then fail to rise when baked. If your kitchen is quite cool the dough could take up to 2 hours to double in size. You can speed this up by standing on top of a pre heated oven. Alternatively place the dough in the fridge if you would prefer to leave it to prove over a few hours instead (e.g. overnight).
  • When making the paste for the crosses, add the milk a bit at a time in order to reach your desired consistency. A thicker paste will give a thiner and more defined cross. A thinner paste will create a wider and flatter cross.

Nutrition

Calories: 483kcal | Carbohydrates: 76g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 92mg | Sodium: 52mg | Potassium: 182mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 508IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Hot Cross Buns Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/hot-cross-buns-recipe/feed/ 4
American Pancakes https://properfoodie.com/american-pancakes/ https://properfoodie.com/american-pancakes/#comments Thu, 14 Jan 2021 18:15:39 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3490 Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes recipe. Make your own deliciously soft American pancakes at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for breakfast in bed, pancake day or...

Read More

The post American Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes recipe. Make your own deliciously soft American pancakes at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for breakfast in bed, pancake day or even for dessert. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A stack of pancakes with a piece of butter melting on the top and syrup poured over and drizzling down one side.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

If you are looking for pancakes that are thick, soft and spongy then this is your recipe. Unlike the British pancake, American style pancakes are small and stackable and have a thick spongy texture that is primed for soaking up lashing of syrup.

This is an easy recipe where wet and dry ingredients are simply whisked together in a bowl. For extra fluffiness the egg whites are separated and then whipped separately and folded into the mixture last. However, for speed and ease the eggs can be left whole if you prefer and simply mixed in with the other wet ingredients.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this American Pancakes recipe you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make American style pancakes with text overlay stating each ingredients

Ingredient notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.

Baking powder: American pancakes use a rising agent to make them thick and fluffy

Eggs: This recipe suggests to separate the eggs. The yolks are added in with the other wet ingredients, whilst the whites are whipped up into soft peaks and folded in separately at the end. This helps to create extra fluffy pancakes.

However, if you are happy to forgo extra fluffiness in favour of ease and time, you can just add whole eggs along with the other wet ingredients. The pancakes will still be fluffy due to the baking powder.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.

Yogurt: The acid in the yogurt helps to activate the baking powder so lifting the pancakes. If preferred this can be substituted with buttermilk, which will have the same affect.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. In a large bowl mix together the flour, caster sugar and baking powder.
  2. In a smaller bowl separate the two egg yolks and whisk together (place the whites to one side for later).
  3. Next add the yogurt and milk to the yolks.
  4. Whisk together well until smooth and fully combined.
    A collage of 4 images showing how to make the recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients and pour in the combined yolks, yogurt and milk.
  6. Whisk everything together into a thick batter.
  7. In a separate smaller bowl whisk the egg whites until soft white peaks form.
  8. Gently fold the egg whites into the pancake mixture.A collage of 4 images showing how to make the recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a medium heat scoop 1 ladle full of pancake mix into the centre of the pan and cook for a minute or so.
  10. Flip the pancake when bubbles start forming on the top of the batter and cook for a further minute  on the second side.
    A collage of 4 images showing how to make the recipe step by step for instructions 9-10.
  11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra flavour and texture mix fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter. For example try these blueberry pancakes.
  • Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine, then carefully and gently fold in the egg whites.
  • If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do I make pancakes fluffy?

Fluffy American pancakes are made by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.

What is the difference between British and American pancakes?

Unlike British pancakes American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than British pancakes.

What to serve with pancakes?

The most simple topping for American style pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey.

Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

How do you know when to flip the pancakes?

The indication that its time to flip your pancake is when bubbles begin to appear on the surface of the batter. However, if your pan isn't hot enough the bubbles may not form and the pancake won't cook properly.

More often than not the first pancake is made before the pan is up to temperature and tends not to work out. This is why its often said that the first pancake should be thrown away. However, with patience theres no need for any waste 🙂

A stack of pancakes on a small plate with butter melting on the top and a small glass jug of syrup in the background.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

📖 Alternatives to pancakes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A stack of American pancakes with a piece of butter melting on the top and syrup poured over and drizzling down one side.
Print

American Pancakes

Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes. Make your own deliciously soft American pancakes at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for breakfast in bed, pancake day or even for dessert.
Course Breakfast, brunch, Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 Pancakes
Calories 110kcal

Ingredients

  • 150 g plain flour
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 tablespoon caster sugar
  • 2 large free range eggs yolks and whites separated
  • 250 ml Greek yogurt
  • 25 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Butter for cooking

Instructions

  • In a large bowl mix together the flour, caster sugar and baking powder.
  • In a smaller bowl separate the two egg yolks and whisk together (place the whites to one side for later).
  • Next add the yogurt and milk to the yolks.
  • Whisk together well until smooth and fully combined.
  • Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients and pour in the combined yolks, yogurt and milk.
  • Whisk everything together into a thick batter.
  • In a separate smaller bowl whisk the egg whites until soft white peaks form.
  • Gently fold the egg whites into the pancake mixture.
  • Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a medium heat scoop 1 ladle full of pancake mix into the centre of the pan and cook for a minute or so.
  • Flip the pancake when bubbles start forming on the top of the batter and cook for a further minute on the second side.
  • Repeat steps 9 and 10 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

Notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.
Baking powder: American pancakes use a rising agent to make them thick and fluffy
Eggs: If you want to save time and don’t mind about making your pancakes extra fluffy you can add eggs whole, along with the other wet ingredients, rather than separate.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.
Yogurt: The acid in the yogurt helps to activate the baking powder so lifting the pancakes. If preferred this can be substituted with buttermilk, which will have the same affect.
How do I make pancakes fluffy? Fluffy pancakes are made by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.
What is the difference between British and American pancakes? Unlike British pancakes American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than British pancakes.
What to serve with pancakes? The most simple topping for American style pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey. Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Nutrition

Serving: 40g | Calories: 110kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 82mg | Potassium: 79mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 59IU | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in February 2017. Updated in January 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post American Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/american-pancakes/feed/ 11
Cinnamon Swirls https://properfoodie.com/cinnamon-swirls/ https://properfoodie.com/cinnamon-swirls/#respond Thu, 12 Nov 2020 22:18:57 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16341 Sweet and delicious cinnamon swirls. Make your own cinnamon swirls at home with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with cinnamon sugar, they are perfect for breakfast, brunch or afternoon tea. [feast_advanced_jump_to]...

Read More

The post Cinnamon Swirls appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Sweet and delicious cinnamon swirls. Make your own cinnamon swirls at home with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with cinnamon sugar, they are perfect for breakfast, brunch or afternoon tea.

Baked cinnamon swirls stuck together in two side by side rows with icing on the top and one roll broken off with a bite taken.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

These rather impressive looking cinnamon swirls are actually really easy to make. With a foolproof method and 10 minute dough recipe that produces soft and fluffy rolls every time.

You don't need a bread machine and theres no need to activate the yeast before adding it to the flour. This is a simple method of adding wet ingredients to dry and bringing it all together into the most perfect and fluffy cinnamon swirls.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a 9x9 inch tin of Cinnamon rolls (9 rolls in a tin) you will need:

Ingredients needed to make nine cinnamon swirls, all lined up side by side in individual bowls

Ingredient notes

Strong white bread flour: Its quite important that the right kind of flour is used for this recipe. Strong bread flour (or just bread flour if you are in the US) contains a higher amount of protein, which will allow for more air to be trapped when the dough rises and bakes. Therefore, producing a light, soft and fluffy cinnamon roll.

Dark brown sugar: Soft dark brown sugar works best in this recipe as it easily mixes and dissolves into the butter. The brown sugar also has a lovely toffee flavour and the darker colour makes the swirl stand out more against the plain bread. Light brown muscovado sugar would also work well here.

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.

Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.

Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the dough to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

Icing - Topping the swirls with icing is completely optional, but I feel icing is a must when it comes to cinnamon swirls. Icing can be piped or drizzled on. Or if you prefer you can add more water to make a thinner icing and then brush over the swirls to create an icing glaze.

If you aren't a fan of icing you could create an apricot glaze instead. To do this heat half a jar of apricot jam in a small pan until its nice and runny. Then brush the jam over the cinnamon swirls after they have been taken out of the oven and whilst they are still warm.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Melt the butter and milk over a low heat in a small pan.
  2. In a large mixing bowl stir together the flour, caster sugar, yeast and salt.
  3. Gradually pour the melted butter and milk into the dry ingredients. Stir well between each addition to eventually form a dough.
  4. Turn the dough out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 2-3 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky.4 images showing steps 1-4 for making Cinnamon rolls: 1. Melt butter into milk in a pan, 2. mix flour, caster sugar, yeast and salt, 3. pour pan mixture into dry ingredients and form a dough, 4. Turn out and knead dough.
  5. Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover.
  6. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  7. Meanwhile mix together the dark brown sugar and cinnamon. Put to one side.
  8. After the dough has risen, uncover and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the dough roughly with your fingertips. Then flour a rolling pin and roll into a rough rectangle 2-3mm thick.4 images showing steps 5-8 for making Cinnamon rolls: 5. Place dough in oiled bowl and cover, 6. leave to rise to double in size, 7. mix cinnamon and dark brown sugar, 8. roll out dough into rectangle 2-3 mm thick.
  9. Use the back of a spoon to spread the softened butter over the surface of the rolled out dough.
  10. Next sprinkle the cinnamon sugar over the buttered dough and gently push into the butter with your fingertips,
  11. Roll up the dough starting from the short side. Roll nice and tight.
  12. Slice off the rough edges at either side of the rolled up dough. Then roughly mark out nine pieces before slicing into nine rolls with a sharp knife.4 images showing steps 9-12 for making Cinnamon Swirls: 9. spread butter on rolled out dough, 10. sprinkle cinnamon sugar over butter, 11. Roll up, 12. slice into 9 even swirls.
  13. Pre heat the oven to 180°C (350°F) and line a 9x9 inch square tin with greaseproof paper. Then place the 9 rolls into the tin, swirls facing up. Cover and leave to rise again for 30 minutes.
  14. Whisk up the egg. Uncover the cinnamon swirls and brush with the egg. Place the cinnamon swirls in the preheated oven and bake for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.2 images showing steps 13 & 14 for making Cinnamon rolls: 13. Place swirls in baking tin, 14. Bake until golden brown

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should baked cinnamon swirls be stored?

Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The rolls will keep well and stay soft for 3-4 days, after this you may find that the rolls start to harden and go stale.

Can this recipe be made ahead of time?

Theres nothing better than fresh cinnamon swirls first thing in the morning. However, you'd have to get up super early to achieve this if making from scratch. Thankfully this recipe can be made the night before, so no need to get up at the crack of dawn.

Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the sliced rolls are placed into the baking tin. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The rolls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Glaze with whisked egg before baking in the oven as per the recipe.

Can you freeze cinnamon swirls?

Once baked and fully cooled, place the swirls in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months.

When ready to eat remove from the freezer and either heat each roll for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then pop in the oven to warm for 5 minutes.

Baked cinnamon swirls stuck together in two side by side rows of three. Golden brown and lying on top of brown paper.

🍰 Other easy baking recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Baked cinnamon swirls stuck together in two side by side rows with icing on the top and one roll broken off with a bite taken.
Print

Cinnamon Swirls

Sweet and delicious cinnamon swirls. Make your own cinnamon swirls at home with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough, no dough hook or bread machine needed! Soft and fluffy and filled with cinnamon sugar, they are perfect for breakfast, brunch or afternoon tea.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch
Cuisine Danish, Scandinavian, Swiss
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
dough rising time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 25 minutes
Servings 9 Swirls
Calories 440kcal

Equipment

  • Small saucepan
  • Large mixing bowl
  • cling film
  • Small mixing bowl
  • rolling pin
  • Sharp knife
  • 9x9 inch square tine lined with greaseproof paper
  • Pastry brush for egg wash

Ingredients

For the bread:

  • 200 ml Semi skimmed 2% milk
  • 100 g unsalted butter cubed
  • 500 g strong white bread flour US: Bread flour
  • 50 g caster sugar
  • 7 g sachet fast action yeast
  • Pinch salt

For the filling:

  • 75 g softened butter
  • 75 g dark brown sugar or muscovado sugar
  • 2 tablespoon ground cinnamon

Toppings:

  • 1 whisked egg to glaze
  • Icing sugar to ice or apricot jam for an apricot glaze

Instructions

  • Melt the butter and milk over a low heat in a small pan.
  • In a large mixing bowl stir together the flour, caster sugar, yeast and salt.
  • Gradually pour the melted butter and milk into the dry ingredients. Stir well between each addition to eventually form a dough.
  • Turn the dough out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 2-3 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky.
  • Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover.
  • Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  • Meanwhile mix together the dark brown sugar and cinnamon. Put to one side.
  • After the dough has risen, uncover and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the dough roughly with your fingertips. Then flour a rolling pin and roll into a rough rectangle 2-3mm thick.
  • Use the back of a spoon to spread the softened butter over the surface of the rolled out dough.
  • Next sprinkle the cinnamon sugar over the buttered dough and gently push into the butter with your fingertips.
  • Roll up the dough starting from the short side. Roll nice and tight.
  • Slice off the rough edges at either side of the rolled up dough. Then roughly mark out nine pieces before slicing into nine rolls with a sharp knife.
  • Pre heat the oven to 180°C (350°F) and line a 9x9 inch square tin with greaseproof paper. Then place the 9 rolls into the tin, swirls facing up. Cover and leave to rise again for 30 minutes.
  • Whisk up the egg. Uncover the cinnamon swirls and brush with the egg. Place the cinnamon swirls in the preheated oven and bake for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Once cooled ice with icing sugar or brush over heated apricot jam.

Video

Notes

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.
Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.
Substitutes: For perfect fluffy rolls its best to not substitute the bread flour. Bread flour has a higher protein content so gives a better rise.
How should baked cinnamon swirls be stored? Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The rolls will keep well and stay soft for 3-4 days, after this you may find that the rolls start to harden and go stale.
Can this recipe be made ahead of time? This recipe can be made the night before, so no need to get up at the crack of dawn for breakfast cinnamon swirls. Make the recipe as per the instructions, up to when the sliced rolls are placed into the baking tin. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The rolls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Glaze with whisked egg before baking in the oven as per the recipe.
Can you freeze cinnamon swirls? Once baked and fully cooled, place the swirls in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat remove from the freezer and either heat each roll for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then pop in the oven to warm for 5 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 440kcal | Carbohydrates: 62g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Sodium: 82mg | Potassium: 120mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 535IU | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cinnamon Swirls appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cinnamon-swirls/feed/ 0
Roast Beef Dinner with Leeks in Cheese Sauce https://properfoodie.com/beef-roast-dinner-leeks-cheese-sauce/ https://properfoodie.com/beef-roast-dinner-leeks-cheese-sauce/#respond Fri, 15 Apr 2016 11:50:53 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1833 How to prepare the perfect Sunday roast - with a full beef joint cooked to your liking, served with veggies and leeks in cheese sauce Sunday roast dinner I'm pretty sure that there's nothing better in the world than sitting down to a Sunday beef roast, well almost nothing, I guess it depends on what...

Read More

The post Roast Beef Dinner with Leeks in Cheese Sauce appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
How to prepare the perfect Sunday roast - with a full beef joint cooked to your liking, served with veggies and leeks in cheese sauce

Topside beef roast dinner

Sunday roast dinner

I'm pretty sure that there's nothing better in the world than sitting down to a Sunday beef roast, well almost nothing, I guess it depends on what dessert is; and if Saturday was a big night out or not; and if lots of wine was consumed; and if by about 4pm on Sunday the biggest meal ever is needed. But anyway - its definitely up there with a cheese & wine on a Friday night, or sipping juice from a coconut on a deserted hot beach on a Monday morning. - its just good and homely, and a proper pick-me-up.

Even if its not Sunday this meal is still the meal of comfort, home and relaxing. Am I convincing you yet? Do you feel the need to rush out and buy meat, potatoes and 3 veggies asap? No? Even if I throw in leeks in a super creamy cheese sauce with a crispy top?

Look .....

Topside of beef with leeks in a creamy cheese sauce

I just can't say no to this!

Soooo as the Sunday roast dinner is  the weekend staple in most households in the Great British Isles, its definitely necessary that I put a beef roast dinner recipe up on the blog. And here's the thing - it really is so easy to  make. No complicated ingredients or recipes and nothing that will mean you have to slave away for hours in the kitchen. A 500g topside of beef can be cooked and served in 40 minutes, so no need to get up at the crack of dawn to switch on the oven.

However, if beef isn't your thing why not try roast chicken instead?

Sunday is a day of rest after a busy week

Last weekend was very busy for me and so a Sunday roast was definitely on the agenda - as mentioned in my last post I had decide to host a little gourmet/birthday drinks night. But in terms of food: a little, turned into a lot and oh my gosh I was pretty stressed. There was lots of running around and multiple trips to the supermarket and I basically spent every night, last week in my kitchen, preparing and cooking everything from soup and chilli con carne to filo-pastry cups and panna cottas. My freezer was rammed, my fridge was bursting and my crisps/treats drawer was overflowing (yes I have a crisps/treats drawer). To say I went over the top is an understatement. But you know - it was a big birthday and I'd just finished a cooking course and its not likely I'll have to do it again any time soon - so I really went for it. It was hard work and cooking for 20 people is definitely like (or probably like) climbing a mountain. But it seemed to go down well and I think everyone enjoyed it.

So, yes, after all the weekend fun was done and tidied away, it was time for beef, perfectly cooked and served with a dollop of leeks in cheese sauce.

Topside of beef roast dinner

Every Sunday should look like this. I hope the recipe below is helpful - let me know, I'd love to hear from you:-) For a greater starter before digging into this perfectly cooked beef why not serve up a delicious leek and potato soup?

Cheese sauce should be in every meal

If your cooking up a storm for a Christmas Day roast then also check out my sprouts in blue cheese sauce here! or for another great way to use cheese sauce is a meal have a look at my cauliflower cheese and fish pie with cheese sauce. Making some party snack? why not have a go at a cheese sauce dip?

📖 Recipe

Topside beef roast dinner leeks in cheese sauce
Print

Beef Roast dinner with leeks in cheese sauce

How to prepare the perfect Sunday roast - with a full beef joint cooked to your liking, served with veggies and leeks in cheese sauce
Course Dinner, roast dinner, sunday dinner, sunday lunch, sunday roast
Cuisine British
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 2 people

Ingredients

  • 500 g Topside of beef
  • 200 g Baby carrots
  • 1 onion quartered
  • 200 g green beans

For the leeks in cheese sauce:

  • 2 medium leeks
  • 30 g plain flour
  • 30 g butter
  • 500 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 100 g mature cheddar cheese grated
  • salt and pepper to season

For the gravy:

  • Juices from the cooked beef
  • ½ pint beef stock
  • 2 teaspoon of gravy powder

Instructions

Sealing the beef:

  • Remove the beef from the fridge 30 minutes before cooking in order to bring it up to room temperature.
  • Put a large frying or griddle pan on high heat. Whilst the pan is heating up place the beef on a large plate or board and drizzle with olive oil. Use your fingers to ensure the meat is fully coated with the oil and then season with salt and pepper. One the pan is smoking hot place in the beef and seal on all sides using tongues to turn every minute or so. Sealing the meat should take 3-4 minutes.

Cooking the beef:

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degree C (Fan).
  • Chop the onion into large chunks and wash the baby carrots. Place the onion and carrots in the base of a roasting tin and balance the beef on top. Cover with foil and place in the oven.
  • For two people I used a 500g topside of beef, cooking time for this varies depending on how well done you like your beef.
  • •For pink (medium-rare) a piece of meat this size will need around 20 minutes in the oven at 180 degrees C.
  • •For medium: 25 minutes, 180 degrees C
  • •for well done: 30 minutes, 180 degrees C
  • Remember this is for a 500g piece of beef and time in the oven will increase with weight. (1.5kg topside cooked to medium will need 1hr 15 minutes.

Resting the beef:

  • How ever you like your beef, the most important stage is resting. Resting the beef after its been in the oven will keep it tender and moist. Its a good idea to try and rest the meat for at least half an hour. For this particular piece of meat, once out of the oven; I removed it from the roasting tin, wrapped in foil and left to rest for 20 minutes.

Veggies:

  • Discard the onion from the roasting tin, pour the juices into a small saucepan ready for the gravy and transfer the baby carrots to a small container and set to one side. For the green beans; first prepare a bowl of cold water and leave at the side of the hob.Bring a pan of water to the boil then simmer and add the beans. Simmer the beans for 3-4 minutes or until just cooked but still a little crunchy (try one!). Once cooked remove the beans from the water and plunge immediately into the bowl of cold water in order to stop the cooking process. Set to one side along with the carrots.

Leeks in cheese sauce:

  • Slice the leeks into 2cm round pieces and line up to cover the base of a baking dish. For the cheese sauce; melt the butter in a small sauce pan over a medium heat, then add the flour and mix together well the form a roux (a smooth white paste which will be used as a thickening agent for the sauce). Take the pan off the heat and gradually add the milk. Stir well in between each addition of milk. return the pan to the heat and gently bring to the boil. Ensure you stir continuously whilst the sauce is heating in order to prevent lumps. Once the sauce begins to boil this will allow the flour to release its starch and you will notice the sauce becomes thick and smooth. At this point add the grated cheese and cook at a simmer for an additional 5 mins in order to melt the cheese and cook out the flour (removes the starchy taste). Remember to keep stirring. Pour the sauce over the leeks and place in the oven to cook for 20 minutes at 180 degrees C. Foil can be placed over the leeks to prevent the top from burning. Once fully cooked (knife will easily push through the leeks) the foil can be removed and the leeks can be finished off under the grill for a crispy top.  

Gravy:

  • heat up the stock and add this to the beef juices continue to heat on a low setting. Put the 2 tsps of gravy powder into a small ramekin or cup, add a small amount of water and stir to form a paste. Pour the paste into the stock and stir well. Continue to stir and heat until the gravy boils and thickens, then turn down the heat and leave to simmer until ready to serve. 

Serving up:

  • Slice up the beef and present on plates or a help yourself style board. In a small frying pan heat up 2 tablespoon oil and 2 tablespoon water- add the pre prepared carrots and beans to the pan and toss in the warm water and oil mixture for 1-2 minutes. this will allow the veggies to be warmed up and will give hem a nice shiny finish. serve veggies along side the meat. Crisp up the leeks under the grill adding more grated cheese or parmesan to the top if desired and serve.
  • Serve the gravy in a gravy boat or drizzle over the beef and veggies.

The post Roast Beef Dinner with Leeks in Cheese Sauce appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/beef-roast-dinner-leeks-cheese-sauce/feed/ 0
Chilli Garlic Prawns Starter https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-griddled-prawns/ https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-griddled-prawns/#comments Sun, 10 Apr 2022 16:47:03 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2815 Chilli garlic prawns starter served on cocktail sticks with pan fried strips of courgette. The king prawns are cooked in a spicy honey glaze and served with a sprinkle of chopped parsley. Make ahead and serve cold straight from the fridge. Or cook up in 30 minutes and serve warm with side of chilli jam....

Read More

The post Chilli Garlic Prawns Starter appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Chilli garlic prawns starter served on cocktail sticks with pan fried strips of courgette. The king prawns are cooked in a spicy honey glaze and served with a sprinkle of chopped parsley.

Make ahead and serve cold straight from the fridge. Or cook up in 30 minutes and serve warm with side of chilli jam. Delicious either way.

Chilli garlic prawns skewered on cocktail sticks with pan fried strips of courgette.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This chilli garlic prawns starter is a great recipe thats easy to prepare and perfect for a make ahead appetiser.

The bright pink of the cooked king prawns stands out against the crunchy green of the courgettes and makes for a really impressive prawns starter, especially if you have friends for dinner. 

Its also a great option for a quick and easy, make ahead, Christmas Day starter.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes approximately 15 chilli garlic prawns on cocktail sticks:

Ingredients for making chilli garlic prawns starter.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

King prawns: King prawns are the best option here as they are large enough to serve on cocktail sticks. This recipe includes instructions for pan frying raw king prawns but if preferred you can use pre cooked prawns.

Mirin: If you can't get hold of any Mirin (sweet Japanese rice wine) you can substitute with 1 teaspoon of caster sugar mixed with 1 tablespoon of either white wine, white wine vinegar or dry sherry

Chilli: Optional.

Parsley: Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped dill or coriander.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Slice the courgette into ribbons using a peeler.
  2. Place the prepared courgette strips in a bowl and drizzle over 2 of the tablespoons of olive oil. Toss well to fully coat. Place a griddle pan on a high heat and set up a large plate with a piece of kitchen towel on, ready for the cooked courgette strips.
  3. Lay the courgette strips side by side in the hot pan and cook off in batches. Note that courgette strips are thin enough to just pan fry on one side.
  4. Leave the courgettes in the pan until griddle marks appear, then remove and place on the plate lined with kitchen towel. Layer more kitchen towel on top of cooked courgettes as the plate fills up.Four images showing how to make chilli garlic prawns starter for steps 1-4.
  5. Pour the remaining tablespoon of olive oil into a small jug or bowl. Add 2 tablespoons of honey, minced garlic clove, chopped chilli, 1 tablespoon mirin rice wine and the chopped parsley.
  6. Mix together well.
  7. Place the griddle pan on a high heat. When the pan is hot add the raw king prawns and pour over the chilli garlic glaze. Pan fry until the prawns turn bright pink.
  8. Transfer the cooked chilli garlic prawns to a bowl along with the glaze. If you think your prawns are cooked but the sauce isn't yet thick or sticky, then remove the prawns and place in a low oven and bring the sauce to a simmer and heat until its the right consistency. Drizzle the sauce over the prawns before it cools and sets.Four images showing how to make chilli garlic prawns starter for steps 5-8.
  9. Make the prawn cocktail sticks by skewering 2 cooked prawns on the stick with 2 folded strips of courgette sandwiched in between (see recipe images).
  10. At this point you can either chill the chilli garlic prawn cocktail sticks and serve cold. Or serve warm and straight away. To ensure a piping hot starter, place the finished 'prawns on sticks' on a baking tray and blast in the oven on high for a minute or so just before serving.
  11. Serve with a drizzle of oil, a sprinkle of fresh parley and a grind of black pepper.

💭 Expert tips

Courgette prep: peel along the length until you reach the seeds. Then turn the courgette and repeat until all sides have been peeled.

Pan fry in batches: both the courgette and the prawns can be pan fried in batches if it won't all fit in the pan at the same time. After cooking, both can be chilled in the fridge or kept warm in a low oven.

Cooking prawns: The best way to cook the prawns for this recipe is to pan fry them in the chilli glaze.

However, if you just want to cook the prawns without a glaze you can simply stir fry with oil or gently poached in simmering water. You will know the prawns are cooked when they turn bright pink all over.

Serving: Serve the chilli garlic prawns on cocktail sticks as suggested or serve piled on top of the courgette on a large platter.

Alternatively, arrange in cocktail glasses or on larger skewers.

Getting a sticky finish on your prawns starter: You may find that your prawns are cooked but the sauce isn't thick or sticky enough.

If this is the case, rather than over cook the prawns, remove them from the pan and place in a low oven to keep warm.

Bring the sauce to a gentle simmer and continue to heat until its the right consistency. Drizzle the sauce over the prawns before it cools and sets.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can you make this recipe ahead of time?

Yes, make and arrange the chilli garlic prawns on cocktail sticks. Then transfer to your serving plate and cover in cling film then chill until ready to serve.

To make ahead but still serve hot the cooked ingredients should be chilled loose and not on cocktail sticks.

When ready to serve follow the reheating instructions below before arranging on sticks. (To ensure a piping hot starter place the finished 'prawns on sticks' on a baking tray and blast in the oven on high for a minute or so just before serving).

Can you reheat cooked prawns?

If you are wanting to reheat the cooked prawns make sure they are fully cooled and then refrigerate.

When ready to reheat; place the chilli garlic prawns on a baking tray and cook in the oven on high for 5 minutes or until sizzling and piping hot (the same method can be used to reheat the courgette).

Alternatively, return to the pan and stir fry in a little oil until piping hot. Use your cooked and chilled prawns within 24 hours. If you have bought pre-cooked prawns, follow the packet instructions for heating.

Honey, chilli and garlic king prawns skewered on cocktail sticks with pan fried courgette.

Prawn starters

An alternative prawns starter ideas include this simple Chinese prawns recipe, which could also be served up on cocktail sticks with a garnish of chopped spring onions. 

If a hot prawns starter isn't your thing, try preparing this recipe then chilling? Alternatively, have a look at Cucumber canapés with prawns, or make your own sushi rolls with prawns.

🍤 Other Prawn or Fish recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Chilli garlic prawns skewered on cocktail sticks with pan fried strips of courgette.
Print

Chilli Garlic Prawns Starter

Chilli garlic prawns starter served on cocktail sticks with pan fried strips of courgette. The king prawns are cooked in a spicy honey glaze and served with a sprinkle of chopped parsley. Make ahead and serve cold straight from the fridge. Or cook up in 30 minutes and serve warm with side of chilli jam. Delicious either way.
Course apperitif, Appetizer, starter
Cuisine British
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 15 cocktail sticks
Calories 55kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 large courgettes
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil (For the courgettes)
  • 300 g fresh raw king prawns
  • 1 tablespoon Oil (for chilli garlic glaze)
  • 2 tablespoon honey
  • 1 garlic clove minced, grated or finely chopped
  • 1 red chilli seeds removed and chilli finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon Mirin sweet Japanese rice wine
  • 20 g parsley roughly chopped
  • Extra oil, parsley and black pepper for serving (optional)

Instructions

  • Slice the courgette into ribbons using a peeler.
    2 large courgettes
  • Place the prepared courgette strips in a bowl and drizzle over 2 of the tablespoons of olive oil. Toss well to fully coat. Place a griddle pan on a high heat and set up a large plate with a piece of kitchen towel on, ready for the cooked courgette strips.
    2 tablespoon olive oil
  • Lay the courgette strips side by side in the hot pan and cook off in batches. Note that courgette strips are thin enough to just pan fry on one side.
  • Leave the courgettes in the pan until griddle marks appear, then remove and place on the plate lined with kitchen towel. Layer more kitchen towel on top of cooked courgettes as the plate fills up.
  • Pour the remaining tablespoon of olive oil into a small jar or bowl. Add the honey, garlic, chilli, mirin rice wine and the chopped parsley.
    1 tablespoon Oil, 2 tablespoon honey, 1 garlic clove, 1 red chilli, 1 tablespoon Mirin, 20 g parsley
  • Mix together well
  • Place the griddle pan on a high heat. When the pan is hot add the raw king prawns and pour over the chilli garlic glaze. Pan fry until the prawns turn bright pink.
    300 g fresh raw king prawns
  • Transfer the cooked prawns to a bowl along with the glaze. If you think your prawns are cooked but the sauce isn't yet thick or sticky, then remove the prawns and place in a low oven and bring the sauce to a simmer and heat until its the right consistency. Drizzle the sauce over the prawns before it cools and sets.
  • Make the prawn cocktail sticks by skewering 2 cooked prawns on the stick with 2 folded strips of courgette sandwiched in between (see recipe images).
  • At this point you can either chill the chilli garlic prawn cocktail sticks and serve cold. Or serve warm and straight away. To ensure a piping hot starter, place the finished 'prawns on sticks' on a baking tray and blast in the oven on high for a minute or so just before serving.
  • Serve with a drizzle of oil, a sprinkle of fresh parley and a grind of black pepper.
    Extra oil, parsley and black pepper for serving

Notes

Courgette prep: peel along the length until you reach the seeds. Then turn the courgette and repeat until all sides have been peeled.
King prawns: King prawns are the best option here as they are large enough to serve on cocktail sticks. This recipe includes instructions for pan frying raw king prawns but if preferred you can use pre cooked prawns.
Cooking prawns: The best way to cook the prawns for this recipe is to pan fry them in the chilli glaze. However, if you just want to cook the prawns without a glaze you can simply stir fry with oil or gently poached in simmering water. You will know the prawns are cooked when they turn bright pink all over.
Pan fry in batches: both the courgette and the prawns can be pan fried in batches if it won't all fit in the pan at the same time. After cooking, both can be chilled in the fridge or kept warm in a low oven.
Mirin: If you can't get hold of any Mirin (sweet Japanese rice wine) you can substitute with 1 teaspoon of caster sugar mixed with 1 tablespoon of either white wine, white wine vinegar or dry sherry
Chilli: Optional.
Parsley: Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped dill or coriander.
Getting a sticky finish on your prawns starter: You may find that your prawns are cooked but the sauce isn't thick or sticky enough. If this is the case, rather than over cook the prawns, remove them from the pan and place in a low oven to keep warm. Bring the sauce to a gentle simmer and continue to heat until its the right consistency. Drizzle the sauce over the prawns before it cools and sets.
Serving: Serve the chilli garlic prawns on cocktail sticks as suggested or serve piled on top of the courgette on a large platter. Alternatively, arrange in cocktail glasses or on larger skewers.
Can you make this recipe ahead of time? Yes, make and arrange the chilli garlic prawns on cocktail sticks. Then transfer to your serving plate and cover in cling film then chill until ready to serve. 

To make ahead but still serve hot the cooked ingredients should be chilled loose and not on cocktail sticks. Then when ready to serve follow the reheating instructions below before arranging on sticks. (To ensure a piping hot starter place the finished 'prawns on sticks' on a baking tray and blast in the oven on high for a minute or so just before serving).
Can you reheat cooked prawns? If you are wanting to reheat the cooked prawns make sure they are fully cooled and then refrigerate. When ready to reheat; place the chilli garlic prawns on a baking tray and cook in the oven on high for 5 minutes or until sizzling and piping hot (the same method can be used to reheat the courgette). 

Alternatively, return to the pan and stir fry in a little oil until piping hot. Use your cooked and chilled prawns within 24 hours. If you have bought pre-cooked prawns, follow the packet instructions for heating.

Nutrition

Serving: 182g | Calories: 55kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 125mg | Potassium: 103mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 207IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Nov 2016. Updated in Apr 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Chilli Garlic Prawns Starter appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-griddled-prawns/feed/ 8
Sugared Pecans and Chocolate Stars https://properfoodie.com/sugared-pecans-chocolate-stars/ https://properfoodie.com/sugared-pecans-chocolate-stars/#comments Mon, 21 Nov 2016 09:00:53 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2857 Crunchy, sugared pecans with a sweet, crumbly layer of sugar. These amazing sugared pecans are perfect as Christmas gifts or are great as toppings on Christmas desserts alongside my chocolate stars and chocolate Christmas trees. This time of year can be so exciting with Christmas still far enough away not to panic or go on any...

Read More

The post Sugared Pecans and Chocolate Stars appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
jump-to-recipe-button

Crunchy, sugared pecans with a sweet, crumbly layer of sugar.

These amazing sugared pecans are perfect as Christmas gifts or are great as toppings on Christmas desserts alongside my chocolate stars and chocolate Christmas trees. This time of year can be so exciting with Christmas still far enough away not to panic or go on any last minute shopping trips; but its still close enough to start thinking ahead and preparing a few little treats.

chocolate-christmas-cake-decorations

Both of these equally delightful and fun treats are really easy to make and add that personal touch, which is always nice at Christmas. The sugared pecans can be made up to one month in advance and store really well in jars, which can be transformed into lovely gifts with a little ribbon and a nice tag

sugared pecans in jars

The chocolate stars and Christmas trees are a little more delicate and serve better as toppings on Christmas cakes and puddings. See my Christmas cake recipe here.

properfoodie christmas cake with chocolate decor and sugared pecans

For the chocolate shapes I recommend using piping bags and practising your piping on a scrap bit of paper to check the consistency of the chocolate and to decide how you want to create your shapes. For the sugared pecans try to break them up whilst they are still warm and just out of the oven. Big bits of unwanted sugar can be easily broken off each nut later on.

white chocolate star decorations

For the perfect home made foodie gift this Christmas: Try making these along with some delicious cranberry mince pies 🙂


📖 Recipe

sugared pecans just out of the oven
Print

Sugared Pecan Nuts and Chocolate Stars

Sugared Pecan Nuts and Chocolate Stars; perfect for Christmas gifts or as toppings on Christmas desserts
Total Time 2 hours
Servings 2 medium jars of nuts and 2-3 trays of chocolate shapes

Ingredients

For the Sugared Pecan Nuts

  • 200 g pecan nuts
  • 1 medium egg white
  • 1 tablespoon tap water
  • 100 g white caster sugar
  • 100 g light brown muscovado sugar
  • 1 teaspoon allspice
  • Pinch crushed sea salt flakes
  • Silicon or grease proof paper

For the Chocolate Stars

  • 100 g milk chocolate baking
  • 100 g white chocolate baking
  • Silicon or grease proof paper
  • Piping bags

Instructions

For the Sugared Pecan Nuts

  • Pre-heat the oven to 160 degrees C (fan) and line a baking tray with silicon or grease proof paper.
  • Start by whisking together the egg white and water until frothy (1-2 mins) and set to one side.
  • In a bowl mix together the white sugar, muscovado sugar, allspice and salt.
  • Add the frothy egg white mixture to the sugar mix and combine, then mix in the nuts ensuring they are fully coated.
  • Transfer the coated nuts to the lined baking tray and spread out evenly across the surface.
  • Place in the oven for 30 minutes. Check at 15 mins, stir / un-stick and then re-spread across the tray.
  • After 30 minutes remove from the oven and break up using a spatula before allowing to fully cool.
  • Once cool use as cake decorations or transfer to jars for storage (can be stored for up to one month).

For the chocolate stars

  • Set up a bain marie on the hob: large pan with 1 cm of water in the bottom and a glass bowl balanced on top of the pan. Heat the pan until the water is boiling.
  • Break up the milk chocolate into 1-2cm pieces and place in the glass bowl. Ensure that the bowl is not touching the water. Leave the chocolate to melt and do not stir until it is fully melted. (Alternatively chocolate can be melted in a microwave - heat in 20 second bursts and stir in between until fully melted).
  • Once melted allow to cool a little and then transfer to piping bags.
  • Repeat this process with the white chocolate.
  • As the chocolate cools it will become slightly thicker and so easier to pipe out - however, left for too long it will solidify in the piping bags. Piping bags can be left near a warm oven to keep the chocolate in its melted state.
  • Lay out some silicon or grease proof paper and snip a small amount off the end of one of the piping bags. How much you snip off will depend on how thick you want the chocolate to be. I suggest having a scrap piece of paper and practising the piping, snipping more off the end of the piping bag if required.
  • Pipe out star shapes and Christmas tree shapes (or other shapes - but try to keep it simple) and then transfer to the fridge for 1 hour in order to set. Once set carefully peel the chocolate shapes off the paper and position on your cake or dessert.
  • Tip: Try to pipe out shapes that are well connected - shapes that are empty in the middle aren't as strong and will break as you try to remove them from the paper.

Nutritional information? For Christmas treats? No idea where I've put that 🙂

 

This post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

sugared-pecans-and-chocolate-stars

The post Sugared Pecans and Chocolate Stars appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sugared-pecans-chocolate-stars/feed/ 6
Mulligatawny Chicken and Wild Rice Soup https://properfoodie.com/mulligatawny-chicken-wild-rice/ https://properfoodie.com/mulligatawny-chicken-wild-rice/#comments Wed, 11 Jan 2017 22:36:59 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3169 Mulligatawny chicken soup, with its slight tingle of spice and its lingering sweet aniseed flavour, is a delight to come home to on a cold Winters night. PJs on, curtains drawn, heating on full blast and a pan of mulligatawny goodness on the stove - all that's left to do is savour every drop and...

Read More

The post Mulligatawny Chicken and Wild Rice Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Mulligatawny chicken soup, with its slight tingle of spice and its lingering sweet aniseed flavour, is a delight to come home to on a cold Winters night. PJs on, curtains drawn, heating on full blast and a pan of mulligatawny goodness on the stove - all that's left to do is savour every drop and then hibernate until spring.mulligatawny

When Christmas is over, the decorations are away and all the pretty colourful lights have been taken down. Winter is truly upon us and there’s nothing on the horizon to cheer us up. On top of all this doom and gloom there always seems to be an abundance of chocolate and sugary snacks knocking about, not that this is all bad news, we all need a bit of chocolate in our lives! But for me, the aftermath of Christmas seems to create a hungry, chocolate-eating monster, which is never satisfied and forever aggravated by the constant supply of leftover Christmas treats.  And yet we’re all supposedly on “New Year, New Me” diets. Its probably the worst time to go on a diet, when all I ever want in January is a huge pile of mash with lashings of onion gravy followed by 3 Terry's chocolate oranges and a couple of mint matchmakers, hmmmmm.

mulligatawny

But, people, let’s not despair, instead let’s get out a humongous bowl of chicken and wild rice mulligatawny soup and laugh in the face of coldness and darkness. Rejoice in the bright colours and nutritious goodness of the chicken, wild rice, carrots, tarragon, and curry powder. Spring will be here before we know it!! …..and so will August and our wedding!! So I best put those chocolates to the back of the cupboard and then get thinking about my waistline and the dress I hope to look ‘oh so graceful and fairy like’ in. So once the choccies are out of sight and out of mind, full attention can be given to the healthy stuff and the best way to make it tasty and comforting.

Mulligatawny

How to make Mulligatawny soup

The recipe for this bowl of mulligatawny soup, is really simple and includes plenty of veggies and protein to get anyone back on the right track. Best of all its one of those recipes that can hoover up all the leftover bits and bobs, including leftover turkey if you want to swap that in for the chicken. You can even include veggies that are on the cusp of, or just over, their best before dates. As this is a soup and everything is thrown in the pot and simmered down, veggies can be limp and lifeless when they go in the pan and with a bit of love and a good mix with some curry powder, they can be revitalised into what is now my favourite winter meal.

mulligatawny

Ingredients for mulligatawny soup

My personal must-have  ingredients for this dish are green, Golden Delicious apples, which melt into a sweet, mushy sauce; and carrots cut into thin, stubby batons, which soften-up during cooking and pair amazingly well with the sweet apple and aniseed flavoured tarragon. However, if you don’t have apples and tarragon you can swap for dried fruits (currants, apricots) and fresh coriander, which tastes just as good.  The main staples for my version of this great Indian classic are shredded Chicken and a mixture of long grain and wild rice. However, any variations can be used for this: leftover turkey or pork meat, chunks of white fish such as cod or haddock, white rice, wholegrain rice, small pastas (orzo, macaroni) or even diced potatoes and sweet potatoes. Open your fridge and cupboards and find the best veggies and carbs that will make your kind of mulligatawny!

For an extra treat, serve up this soup with my easy homemade bread rolls.

📖 Recipe

Mulligatawny
Print

Mulligatawny Chicken and Wild Rice Soup

A warming chicken and wild rice mulligatawny soup perfect for a cold winters night and great for using up leftover meat and veggies
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Calories 292kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 Onions finely chopped
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped
  • 1 large carrot peeled and chopped into small batons
  • 1 green apple cubed
  • 150 g of long grain and wild rice
  • Splash of white wine
  • 700 ml Chicken stock
  • 2 tablespoon Curry powder
  • 1 teaspoon Ground coriander
  • 2 teaspoon Black onion seeds
  • 1 tablespoon brown muscovado sugar
  • 200 g Chicken or turkey meat shredded
  • 1 tablespoon Plain flour
  • Handful of fresh tarragon leaves
  • Seasoning
  • Harissa paste or fresh chilli for extra flavour and heat if desired

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in large pan. Gently fry the onions and garlic until soft. Add the uncooked rice to the pan and stir well ensuring each grain is coated in oil. Keeping the pan on a medium heat and add the splash of wine and half the stock. Then add the carrot, apple, curry powder, ground coriander, onion seeds and sugar. Bring to the boil and then simmer.
  • Top up with the remaining stock as required. Once all the stock has been added mix in the chicken or turkey and continue to simmer and reduce. After the 30 minutes check the consistency. If the soup is thinner than you would like make a paste using the tablespoon of plain flour and a little cold water. Add the paste to the soup and stir continuously until it thickens. Add more flour paste if required. If your soup is too thick add water until you are happy with the consistency. Always check the taste and add more spices if the taste has been watered down.
  • Taste the soup and season if desired. At this point the soup can be transferred to seal-able containers, left to cool and then frozen. If serving immediately, divide into bowls and top with fresh tarragon. If desired a tablespoon of harissa paste or fresh chopped chillies can be stirred in just before serving to give extra flavour or heat.

Nutrition

Serving: 410g | Calories: 292kcal | Fat: 7.4g

Nutritional Info

**Estimated nutritional information per serving of chicken mulligatawny and per 100g of Chicken mulligatawny. If you want to find out more about how the information is calculated and the sources used, please refer to my Nutrition Information Guide.

Mulligatawny Chicken & Wild rice soup

The post Mulligatawny Chicken and Wild Rice Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mulligatawny-chicken-wild-rice/feed/ 4
Chocolate Brownies Recipe https://properfoodie.com/hazelnut-white-chocolate-brownies/ https://properfoodie.com/hazelnut-white-chocolate-brownies/#comments Thu, 09 Feb 2017 15:37:34 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3401 Light and crumbly chocolate brownies dotted with hazelnuts and white chocolate chunks, finished off with a melted chocolate topping.  Incredibly tasty squares of chocolate goodness! Home baking The actual making and baking of these chocolate brownies is so simple and easy. There is no need for a food mixer and no waiting around for hours,...

Read More

The post Chocolate Brownies Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Light and crumbly chocolate brownies dotted with hazelnuts and white chocolate chunks, finished off with a melted chocolate topping.  Incredibly tasty squares of chocolate goodness!

chocolate brownies with hazelnut

Home baking

The actual making and baking of these chocolate brownies is so simple and easy. There is no need for a food mixer and no waiting around for hours, patiently checking whether your baking-masterpiece has finished cooking. This is a straight forward recipe using just a couple of bowls, a whisk and plenty of love. For brownies that don't require any slicing up at the end, have a try of brownie chocolate muffins.

If you are looking for more baking inspiration there's plenty to have a go at in the dessert section of the website. I highly recommend my bakewell tart as it is one of my absolute favourites!

I am a nutritionist, and yes, some would say I am meant to promote lettuce and avocados, but sometimes we all need a little chocolate in our lives and so today I'm promoting homemade baking and 'everything in moderation'.

chocolate brownie fresh out of the oven

How to make chocolate brownies

Start by melting the chocolate. Whisk the eggs and sugar separately until pale, combine everything into a bowl and mix together. Pour mixture into a baking tin and place into a pre-heated oven (180°) and set the timer for half an hour.

Check to see if the brownie is fully cooked by inserting a skewer into the centre. If it comes out a little gooey after 30 minutes return to the oven for another 5 minutes, before checking again.

Leave to completely cool before removing from its tin. I've made the mistake of being super eager to get it out of the tin in the past, and that usually ends in disaster, with the top half of the cake on the cooling rack and the bottom half still in the tin. So take heed, and leave it for a good hour or even 2 hours if you can.

Run a knife around the edge of the tin and gently turn out onto a board or wire rack (as it will be completely cool by this point, I prefer to use a board).

Divide into 25 little squares.

The decoration for these chocolate brownies is even more chocolate: two types to be exact, which I simply melted in the microwave, transferred to a small piping bag and then roughly piped over each brownie.

You can of course decorate however you prefer, just leave plain or even whip up a bit of cream to pop on top if you like!

chocolate brownies with hazelnut

Chocolate brownies recipe ingredients

The ingredients you will need to make this recipe are:

  • 220g unsalted butter
  • 280g milk chocolate chips
  • 4 medium eggs
  • 300g golden caster sugar
  • 100g plain flour
  • 100g cocoa powder
  • 100g chopped hazel nuts
  • 100g white chocolate chips
  • Butter and icing sugar to line the tin
  • 100g milk chocolate 100g white chocolate for decoration

Why are my chocolate brownies dry?

This recipe is to achieve a light and crumbly brownie, however if your aiming to make your chocolate brownies gooey you will need to add more of the chocolate and butter elements to tip the balance towards fudgy rather than cakey. modify this recipe by increasing the unsalted butter to 250g and the milk chocolate chips to 300g.

Dry brownies are usually a result of a higher ratio of drier ingredients like the flour and cocoa powder as opposed to the butter and chocolate elements, also a reduced cooking time will help your cake to retain some of its moisture. Don't forget your brownies won't firm up until completely cool, so remove them from the oven in time to allow for this if required.

How do I know when my brownies are done?

To test whether your chocolate brownies are ready take a skewer or the tip of a knife and pierce the cake in the centre, as you draw the knife or skewer out notice whether there is any brownie sticking to the blade. If you are looking for a light and crumbly or 'cakey' brownie you want the knife/skewer to come out clean. If you want a gooey or 'fudge like' brownie you want a little of the inside to come with it, make sure the skewer is hot though as this indicates the brownie is hot to the centre and not under done.

Do you leave brownies to cool in the tin?

Yes! I leave my brownies to cool in the tin. In the past I have been too eager to get at my brownies and have disturbed them before they've had a chance to firm up enough to stay in one piece.  Brownies ideally should be removed from the oven just as the centre is firming up, this allows for them to finish on the worktop before they cool down. The result is a brownie that is easily turned out onto a board without being too dry in the middle.

📖 Recipe

Chocolate brownies chocolate on chocolate
Print

Hazelnut and White Chocolate Brownies

Hazelnut & white Chocolate brownies with chocolate decoration - perfect for keeping things sweet this valentines
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, pudding
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Calories 210kcal

Ingredients

  • 220 g Unsalted butter
  • 280 g Milk chocolate chips
  • 4 medium eggs
  • 300 g golden caster sugar
  • 100 g plain flour
  • 100 g cocoa powder
  • 100 g chopped hazel nuts
  • 100 g white chocolate chunks/chips

Equipment

  • 1 square 9 inch x 9 inch baking tin

Extras

  • Butter and icing sugar to line the tin and prevent sticking
  • 100 g milk chocolate and 100g white chocolate for decorating if desired

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan). Butter the baking tin and dust with icing sugar, this will prevent the brownie from sticking during baking.
  • Cut up the butter into chunks and add to a microwavable bowl, along with the 280g of chocolate chips. Microwave in 20 second bursts, stirring in between until fully melted. (NB: with the butter mixed in, this won't take long to melt at all).
  • Place the melted chocolate and butter to one side.
  • In a mixing bowl whisk together the sugar and eggs. The mix of sugar and eggs is known as a sabayon. However, to achieve a good sabayon there is no room for gentle mixing: get your muscles out and whisk well until the mixture goes paler and begins to ribbon with the movement of the whisk.
  • Pour the melted chocolate and butter into the sabayon and stir in well. Then sieve in the flour and cocoa powder and use a spatula to gently fold in. It will appear quite dry at first, but keep folding and eventually the mixture will come together. Finally add the hazelnuts and white chocolate, and fold in again, before gently transferring to the prepared baking tin. use a knife or spatula to spread the mixture evenly in the tin.
  • Pop in the oven for 30 minutes, then check by inserting a skewer into the centre of the cake. If the skewer comes out gooey then put back in for a further 5 minutes. Check again and return to the oven if required, do not bake past 45 minutes as the edges of the brownie will begin to burn.
  • Once fully baked, leave on the side, in the tin, to completely cool. This usually takes 1-2 hours.
  • Only remove from the tin once you are satisfied that the brownie is complete cooled.
  • To remove, run a knife around the edge of the tin, then place a board over the top of the tin and gently turn over to release the brownie.
  • Cut up the slab into suitably sized square pieces: I usually cut off the edges first to remove any charring and to neaten up. Then divide into 20-25 small squares.

If you would like to decorate the brownies as in the pictures:

  • Melt 100g of white chocolate in the microwave (20 second bursts), then transfer to a piping bag, snip off the end and roughly pipe chocolate zig zags over each brownie. Repeat this with milk chocolate, then leave on the side to fully set.

Nutrition

Serving: 46g | Calories: 210kcal | Carbohydrates: 12.6g | Protein: 4.1g | Fat: 16.3g | Saturated Fat: 8.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5.9g | Fiber: 0.7g | Sugar: 8.8g

Pin for later

Imagine light, crumbly chocolate brownies, dotted with hazelnuts and white chocolate chucks, then finished off with zig zags of melted chocolate. Then imagine surprising that special someone with these incredibly tasty squares of chocolate goodness, made just for them, by you, with your own amazing baking skills!

The post Chocolate Brownies Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/hazelnut-white-chocolate-brownies/feed/ 16
Baileys Coffee https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/ https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/#comments Mon, 10 Dec 2018 19:58:07 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8166 Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top! [feast_advanced_jump_to] ☕ Why make this recipe? Baileys Irish cream is one of my favourite...

Read More

The post Baileys Coffee appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top!

Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

☕ Why make this recipe?

Baileys Irish cream is one of my favourite liqueurs to go into a coffee. Its particularly good if you prefer a creamier or milky coffee.

Baileys coffee is super easy to make and all you need is coffee, Baileys Irish Cream, honey and cream.

This particular recipe uses black coffee with Baileys added directly to this. However, a latte coffee (shot of coffee made up with milk) could be used so making a Baileys latte version instead.

Make for an afternoon treat in front of the fire on a colds winter day or whip up this warming baileys beverage for your guests after a festive dinner party.

🥘 Ingredients

To make Baileys coffee for 2 people you will need the following ingredients:

  • 400 ml freshly made black coffee (enough for 2) (instant or ground)
  • 2 tsp Golden syrup or honey
  • 2 x 50ml measures of Baileys Irish Cream
  • 50 ml double cream
  • Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve (optional)

Ingredient notes

Coffee: black coffee can be replaced with latte coffee (a shot of coffee made up with milk) if you would prefer a creamier version or if you don't want the finished drink to be too strong in terms of coffee flavour and caffeine amount.

🔪 Instructions

  1. First heat your mugs or coffee glasses by pouring in warm/boiling water and leaving to warm up for a couple of minutes
  2. Next prepare the coffee (instant/ground/machine) - your choice of black or latte coffee. Make enough to fill your mugs or glasses. Allow this to cool for a few minutes before using. If the coffee is too hot the Baileys will curdle when added.
  3. Empty the water from the glasses or mugs and add a teaspoon of syrup or honey to the bottom of each glass (the sugar will help the cream to float on top when added later on)
  4. Then divide the slightly cooled coffee or latte between to 2 glasses or mugs, leaving around 2 cm of space at the top so the Baileys and cream can be added. Stir well to dissolve the syrup.
  5. Next carefully add a measure of Baileys to each glass. If using black coffee try to pour the Baileys in slowly to allow the liqueur to sit nearer the top so creating gradual change in colour down the glass. 
  6. Finally add the cream to the top: Stir the cream well first then pour slowly over the back of a spoon so the cream sits above the Irish coffee. The tip of the spoon should be just touching the surface of the coffee as you pour and the cream should run off the spoon and onto the top of the Baileys coffee.
  7. Sprinkle over some freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder and serve.
Baileys coffee - properfoodie - Debbie Jones

💭 Frequently asked questions

How much baileys to add to a baileys coffee

The standard shot size for a measure of Baileys is 50ml (double measure), which is the amount used in this recipe. As Baileys isn't too strong in terms of alcohol content its usual to use a 50ml measure.

When to have Baileys coffee

Baileys coffee is great at any time of year. Particularly after a filling meal, when you can't quite fit in dessert but still want a treat.

Its also especially good at Christmas. Christmas wouldn't be Christmas without Baileys Irish Cream. I usually take mine on the rocks or even with crushed ice, whilst I'm busy wrapping presents or making one of my Christmas recipes.

Other Christmas recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Baileys latte
Print

Baileys Irish cream with Coffee

Irish cream coffee! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top!
Course aperitif, aperitivo, beverage, Dessert, digestif, Drinks
Cuisine British, Christmas, irish
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 284kcal

Equipment

  • Coffee Glasses or mugs

Ingredients

  • 400 ml Freshly made black coffee (enough for 2) (Instant or ground)
  • 2 teaspoon Golden syrup or honey
  • 2 50ml measures of Baileys Irish cream
  • 50 ml double cream
  • Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve (optional)

Instructions

  • First heat your mugs or coffee glasses by pouring in warm/boiling water and leaving to warm up for a couple of minutes
  • Next prepare the coffee (instant/ground/machine) - your choice of black or latte coffee. Make enough to fill your mugs or glasses. Allow this to cool for a few minutes before using. If the coffee is too hot the Baileys will curdle when added.
    400 ml Freshly made black coffee
  • Empty the water from the glasses or mugs and add a teaspoon of syrup or honey to the bottom of each glass (the sugar will help the cream to float on top when added later on)
    2 teaspoon Golden syrup or honey
  • Then divide the slightly cooled coffee or latte between to 2 glasses or mugs, leaving around 2 cm of space at the top so the Baileys and cream can be added. Stir well to dissolve the syrup.
  • Next carefully add a measure of Baileys to each glass. If using black coffee try to pour the Baileys in slowly to allow the liqueur to sit nearer the top so creating gradual change in colour down the glass. 
    2 50ml measures of Baileys Irish cream
  • Finally add the cream to the top: Stir the cream well first then pour slowly over the back of a spoon so the cream sits above the Irish coffee. The tip of the spoon should be just touching the surface of the coffee as you pour and the cream should run off the spoon and onto the top of the Baileys coffee.
    50 ml double cream
  • Sprinkle over some freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder and serve.
    Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve

Notes

How much baileys to add to coffee: The standard shot for a measure of baileys is 50ml, which is the amount used in this recipe. As baileys isn't too strong in terms of alcohol content its usual to use a 50ml measure. This amount will also allow for the baileys flavour to be distinguished against the coffee.
Substitutions: black coffee can be replaced with latte coffee (a shot of coffee made up with milk) if you would prefer a creamier version or if you don't want the finished drink to be too strong in terms of coffee flavour and caffeine amount.
When to have Baileys coffee: Baileys coffee is great at any time of year. Particularly after a filling meal, when you can't quite fit in dessert but still want a treat. Its also especially good at Christmas.
 

Nutrition

Serving: 258g | Calories: 284kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 117mg | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 368IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Baileys Coffee appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/feed/ 2
Christmas soup: celeriac and potato https://properfoodie.com/christmas-soup-celeriac-hazelnut/ https://properfoodie.com/christmas-soup-celeriac-hazelnut/#comments Mon, 10 Dec 2018 22:38:10 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8187 Festive homemade Celeriac and potato Christmas soup topped with hazelnuts, truffle oil and a cranberry and brie crouton Christmas soup Full of wintery veggies and topped with a toasted brie and cranberry crouton, this celeriac soup is perfect for Christmas. Be it a cosy Christmas Eve soup, a delectable starter on Christmas day, or even...

Read More

The post Christmas soup: celeriac and potato appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Festive homemade Celeriac and potato Christmas soup topped with hazelnuts, truffle oil and a cranberry and brie crouton

Celeriac soup

Christmas soup

Full of wintery veggies and topped with a toasted brie and cranberry crouton, this celeriac soup is perfect for Christmas. Be it a cosy Christmas Eve soup, a delectable starter on Christmas day, or even a freezer meal tucked away for those chilled out nights when no one wants to cook. The creamy potato and nutty celeriac are sure to bring smiles all round. If celeriac isn't your thing cauliflower soup is also a great option for Christmas.

Christmas soup - properfoodie

How to prepare celeriac

So the star of this Christmas recipe is of course Celeriac - the large bulbous root of the celery plant. Celeriac root is actually very easy to peel and chop up and once chopped it can be eaten raw or cooked, although in this case we are cooking it. To peel the celeriac use a large sharp knife and gently slice the skin off moving the knife around the edge of the root (see video below for a better visual of this). Next simply slice and dice the peeled celeriac, which can then be boiled or roasted - here we are simmering in our soup.

Celeriac and potato soup

Celeriac and potato soup

The base of this soup is chopped onion, diced potato and diced celeriac. Seasoned with bay and thyme and then blended until smooth. Its so quick and so easy to prepare and as we're all so terribly busy at Christmas, its also nice to know that this can be prepared in advanced and either refrigerated for up to 3 days or kept in the freezer for up to 3 months.
Celeriac and Potato Christmas Soup_Debra Jones

Cranberry and Brie Crouton

To make this soup extra festive I like to top mine with a brie and cranberry crouton, made simply by: slicing up a french stick, topping each round with a piece of brie and a blanched cranberry, and then grilling on high for 5 minutes or until the cheese is melted. Personally I love a truffle brie and it goes amazingly well with this celeriac soup.

Other soups you might like:

For more soup ideas have a look at my soup recipes collection

📖 Recipe

Celeriac soup
Print

Celeriac and Potato Christmas soup

Festive homemade Celeriac and potato Christmas soup topped with hazelnuts, truffle oil and a cranberry and brie crouton
Course Appetizer, Christmas, starter, supper
Cuisine British, Christmas
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 209kcal

Ingredients

For the soup

  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 large onions 325g peeled and finely chopped
  • 1 large clove of garlic 5g finely chopped
  • 2 sprigs fresh thyme
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 1 small celeriac 750g peeled and cubed
  • 2 small baking potatoes 300g peeled and cubed
  • 500 ml Vegetable stock
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • 2 tablespoon Creme Fraiche

For the topping


  • 1 small French stick
  • Chopped blanched hazelnuts
  • Brie cut into slices truffle flavoured if desired
  • Handful of fresh cranberries
  • Extra fresh thyme
  • Few drizzles of olive oil or truffle oil.

Instructions

To make the Soup

  • Heat the oil in a large pan and fry the chopped onion and garlic until soft. While the onions are cooking peel and chop the celeriac and potatoes. Next add the bay leaves, sprigs of thyme, celeriac and potatoes. Pour over the stock and bring to the boil. Then place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes.

To make the Brie and Cranberry Croutons

  • These are best prepared fresh - so if preparing soup in advance don’t make the croutons until you are ready for them. Place a handful of fresh cranberries into a small container or cup and cover with boiling water - set to one side for 2 minutes. Next slice 1 cm thick circles from a French stick. Each circle will be a crouton for the soup - prepare as many croutons as you need. Place the bread rounds on a baking tray and top each one with a slice of brie. Next carefully remove the cranberries from the hot water and push one or two cranberries into the cheese on each piece of bread. Heat the grill.

Finishing the soup and serving

  • After 20 minutes remove the lid from the soup pan. Find and remove the bay leaves and thyme. Use a hand or stand blender to blitz the soup until smooth. To make it extra smooth pass well blended soup through a sieve.
  • Finally, season and stir in the honey and creme fraiche.
  • To serve, reheat the soup and place the croutons under a high grill for 5 minutes or until the cheese is melted. Ladle out the soup, top with hazelnuts and truffle oil and place a grilled crouton on the top.
  • Or alternatively store the soup in sealable containers and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days or the freezer for up to 3 months.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 347g | Calories: 209kcal | Carbohydrates: 27.6g | Protein: 7.6g | Fat: 8.1g | Saturated Fat: 2.7g | Sodium: 360mg | Sugar: 7.6g

The post Christmas soup: celeriac and potato appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/christmas-soup-celeriac-hazelnut/feed/ 1
Spicy Chicken Soup (/leftover turkey soup) https://properfoodie.com/spicy-chicken-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/spicy-chicken-soup/#comments Thu, 13 Dec 2018 18:23:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8216 A delicious, spicy chicken soup crammed full of Indian spices, off-set by the sweetness of vine tomatoes and cooling creme fraishe. With the addition of both yellow and green spilt peas this filling soup not only satisfies the hungriest of crowds but also ticks the box for a healthy and nutritious meal. And if thats...

Read More

The post Spicy Chicken Soup (/leftover turkey soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A delicious, spicy chicken soup crammed full of Indian spices, off-set by the sweetness of vine tomatoes and cooling creme fraishe. With the addition of both yellow and green spilt peas this filling soup not only satisfies the hungriest of crowds but also ticks the box for a healthy and nutritious meal. And if thats not enough - its also great for using up leftover turkey or leftover chicken!!

split pea and spicy chicken soup

Spicy Chicken Soup with yellow and green split peas

If you're ever in need of a recipe that will feed a crowd but isn't the usual hot pot, chicken tikka masala curry or chilli con carne, then a spicy chicken soup, which is actually more of stew, will always do the job. This particular soup is also bulked up with split peas, which soak up all the spicy Indian flavours and also adds a wonderful texture to the soup.

Yellow split pea soup

What do you put in a homemade chicken soup?

Generally when it comes to chicken or turkey soup  - anything goes. Its great for using up leftovers and clearing out the fridge. So its especially good at Christmas when theres plenty of leftover turkey and veggies. So even though its not written in the recipe - if you have leftover carrots, leftover leeks, leftover potatoes - whatever - chuck em in!

In the recipe below I've actually stayed more true to a tarka dahl type curry - using onions, tomatoes and pulses as the base of the dish. But the beauty of this soup is that you can choose what goes in and what stays out. And that includes the spices. . . . Theres a great article here: for inspiration on different spices and how you can use them.

chicken and split pea soup recipe

How do you make spicy chicken soup?

If you are using leftover chicken or turkey then this goes in towards the end of the recipe. Same goes for raw chicken accept a little prep is required before hand, where the chicken is seared off in a pan first. The rest of the ingredients, apart from the split peas, all go into one big pan and are cooked down into a soup. The split peas are boiled in water in a separate pan for around 45 minutes to ensure they are nice and soft before being mixed into the soup.

yellow split pea and spicy chicken soup

How can I spice up a chicken soup?

If you have ever asked yourself this question then this recipe is your answer! Turmeric, garam masala, cumin seed, fresh coriander, fresh chilli, and garlic -  all provide an array of spice and flavour and really do boost a chicken soup in both colour and taste. Of course a very similar recipe to this, which will also give the same affect, is mulligatawny soup. - My recipe for this uses carrots, nigella(onion) seeds, and wild rice - love it!! If you're after a more mellow soup why not try tuscan ribollita soup, leek and potato soup or creamy cauliflower soup.

spicy chicken and split pea soup

This soup is made extra special with the toppings of creme fraiche, spring onion and fresh coriander - It just wouldn't be the same without these 🙂 Enjoy!!

OTHER SPICY RECIPES:

For more recipe ideas for a cosy night in have a look at my romantic dinner recipes post.

📖 Recipe

split pea and spicy chicken soup
Print

Spicy chicken soup

A delicious spicy chicken soup crammed full of Indian spices, off-set by sweet vine tomatoes and cooling creme fraiche. With the addition of both yellow and green spilt peas this filling soup not only satisfies the hungriest of crowds but also ticks the box for a healthy and nutritious meal. And if thats not enough - its also great for using up leftover turkey or leftover chicken!!
Course Appetizer, Main Course, Soup, starter
Cuisine British, Indian, leftovers
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 people
Calories 470kcal

Ingredients

  • 200 g yellow split peas
  • 200 g green split peas
  • 800 g raw Chicken breast or 650g cooked leftover Chicken/Turkey
  • ½ tablespoon olive oil (to cook chicken if using raw)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil (for frying off the onions)
  • 500 g onion finely chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic finely chopped (7g)
  • 500 g vine tomatoes quartered and seeds scooped out and discarded.
  • ½ teaspoon turmeric
  • 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • ½ teaspoon garam masala
  • ½ teaspoon medium curry powder
  • Salt and pepper
  • 2 green chillies finely chopped (25g)
  • 2 tablespoon tomato puree
  • 500 ml water

To serve:

  • Creme fraiche
  • Sliced spring onion
  • Fresh coriander

Instructions

  • Place the split peas into a medium sized pan, cover with double the amount of water, bring to the boil and simmer for 45 minutes with the lid on (or follow instructions on pack).
  • Whilst the split peas are cooking prepare the raw chicken (skip this step if using cooked chicken or turkey): Slice the chicken into 2 cm chunks. Heat up half a tablespoon olive oil in a large frying pan or wok and add the raw chicken. Seal the meat on all sides and fry for at least 5 minutes. Transfer the chicken to a bowl and set to one side.
  • Check the split peas - add more water if needed and keep at a simmer.
  • Next start to make the soup: In a large pan heat 1 tablespoon of oil. Add the chopped onion and garlic and cook gently until soft. Next add the quartered vine tomatoes (seeds removed), followed by the turmeric, cumin seeds, garam masala, curry powder, and seasoning. Stir well ensuring the spices fully coat the onions and tomatoes. Cook for a further 2 minutes to allow the tomatoes to soften.
  • Next add the chopped green chilli, tomato puree and 500ml tap water. Stir well.
  • Now mix in the chicken breast that was sealed off earlier. Or if using pre cooked / leftover turkey or chicken now is the time to slice or shred this and add to the soup. Mix well and bring everything to a simmer.
  • Finally return to the split peas - taste test to see if they are cooked through and soft. If so, drain and transfer to the soup. Mix well one last time.
  • If the soup appears a little thin, continue to simmer on a low heat until reduced down to the right consistency.
  • Serve up and top with creme fraiche, spring onions and fresh coriander. Or transfer and store in sealable containers. This soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Serving: 460g | Calories: 470kcal | Carbohydrates: 49.7g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 3.4g | Potassium: 240mg | Sugar: 10.2g

The post Spicy Chicken Soup (/leftover turkey soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/spicy-chicken-soup/feed/ 2
Bakewell Tart https://properfoodie.com/bakewell-tart/ https://properfoodie.com/bakewell-tart/#respond Thu, 18 Apr 2019 14:27:50 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9710 Bakewell tart with raspberry jam - a dessert that I will never tire of. I simply adore the soft, almond frangipane encased in a delicate, crumbly pastry. - Theres just no beating the flavour. Definitely served best when warm out of the oven and whilst the smell of warm almonds and sticky, hot jam still...

Read More

The post Bakewell Tart appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Bakewell tart with raspberry jam - a dessert that I will never tire of. I simply adore the soft, almond frangipane encased in a delicate, crumbly pastry. - Theres just no beating the flavour. Definitely served best when warm out of the oven and whilst the smell of warm almonds and sticky, hot jam still lingers in the air.

raspberry jam bakewell tarts

This sweet, crumbly traditional dessert is a fabulous option to finish off any meal. Its the perfect partner to classic main course like steak and ale pie, healthy fish and chips, minted lamb pie or fish pie.

Why is it called a Bakewell tart?

The Bakewell tart is closely associated with the small town of Bakewell in Derbyshire, England. Although theres no evidence to suggest the tart originated from here, it may well have taken its name from this quintessential town. The Bakewell tart is a variation of the original Bakewell pudding and the bakeries in Bakewell are often found to be selling Bakewell pudding rather than tart.

slices of bakewell tart

What is the difference between Bakewell tart and Bakewell pudding?

The Bakewell tart is made using sweet shortcrust pastry and a frangipane filling, the pudding uses puff pastry and a thicker custard-type almond paste for the filling.

raspberry and almond bakewell

What is frangipane made of?

  • Soft unsalted butter
  • Caster sugar
  • Medium eggs
  • Ground almonds
  • Plain flour

Adding icing sugar to bakewell slices

Please note that the below contains an affiliate link to a product I am recommending, which means if you click this link and then go on to purchase the product, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. If you do click and buy – Thank you for helping in the continuation of this blog, it really means a lot!! I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

How do you make Bakewell tart?

  1. Set up the food processor and add to the mixing compartment: 125g flour, 50g ground almonds, 100g cold, cubed butter, 75g icing sugar and a pinch of salt. Pulse for a few seconds until the mixture resembles fine breadcrumbs.Ingredients in processor for making pastry

  2. whisk together 1 egg yolk, with 1 tablespoon cold water and 1tsp vanilla extract. Return to the breadcrumb mix in the processor and gradually add the egg mix whilst continuing to pulse. Add enough egg mix for the pastry to just come together.

  3. Flour your work surface then turn out the pastry and shape into a ball - then wrap in cling film and chill in the fridge.homemade sweet shortcrust pastry

  4. Place 230g soft butter and 230g caster sugar into the processor and blend for at least 5 minutes or until pale and creamy. Next whisk together the eggs and gradually add to the creamed butter and sugar whilst continuing to blend. Add the flour and ground almonds and continue to blend until smooth.making frangipane in a processor

  5. Take the pastry from the fridge, unwrap and start to carefully roll out. Try to roll the pastry to the shape of your tin. Carefully roll the pastry around the rolling pin and transfer to the tin. Roll back out and then gently shape the pastry to the base of the tin. I used a rectangular loose base fluted tin: MasterClass Non-Stick Fluted Rectangular Tart Tin / Quiche Pan With Loose Base, 36 x 13 cmpastry lining tart tin

  6. Place the raspberry jam in a bowl and mix to loosen it. Carefully spread the jam across the base of the pastry ensuring it goes all the way into the corners.Layer of jam added to the pastry

  7. Now take the frangipane filling and pour over the jam. Fill the tart tin up to about ¾ full. Scatter flaked almonds over the surface of the frangipane then place the tart in the centre of the preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes.Franginpane poured over the top of the jam

How long will Bakewell tart keep?

This tart will keep well in an airtight container for up to one week.

Bakewell jam

The filling in a Bakewell tart is always jam but the type of jam can be completely of your choosing. I love this tart with raspberry jam but for something a little different why not try with fig jam or rhubarb jam.

Other traditional dessert recipes you might like:

📖 Recipe

Bakewell tart
Print

Bakewell tart

Bakewell tart with raspberry jam - with soft, almond frangipane encased in a delicate, crumbly pastry. Served best when warm out of the oven and whilst the smell of warm almonds and sticky, hot jam still lingers in the air.
Course Dessert, party food, pudding
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 12 people
Calories 514kcal

Ingredients

For the pastry:

  • 125  plain flour
  • 50  ground almonds
  • 100  unsalted butter cold
  • Pinch  of sea salt
  • 75  icing sugar
  • egg yolk
  • tsp  vanilla extract
  • tbsp  cold water

For the Frangipane

  • 230  soft unsalted butter
  • 230  caster sugar
  • medium eggs
  • 130  ground almonds
  • 45  plain flour

For the filling:

  • 300 g seedless raspberry jam
  • 100 g flaked almonds

To make the Bakewell tart:

  • Extra flour for work surfaces
  • Fresh raspberries and icing sugar to serve

Equipment

  • Food processor
  • Rolling pin
  • Loose bottom fluted tart tin (I used a rectangular one - 36 x 13 cm)

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 200 degrees C. Before you begin make sure the butter for the pastry has been in the fridge is super cold and that the butter for the frangipane is soft and at room temperature.

To make the pastry:

  • Set up the food processor and add to the mixing compartment: 125g flour, 50g ground almonds, 100g cold, cubed butter, 75g icing sugar and a pinch of salt. Pulse for a few seconds until the mixture resembles fine breadcrumbs. (don’t pulse for two long as the pastry will form best when the ingredients stay as cold as possible). 

  • In a small jug whisk together 1 egg yolk, with 1 tablespoon cold water and 1tsp vanilla extract. Return to the breadcrumb mix in the processor and gradually add the egg mix whilst continuing to pulse. Add enough egg mix for the pastry to just come together and no more - you may not need all of it. As soon as the pastry starts to come together stop adding the egg.

  • Flour your work surface then turn out the pastry and shape into a ball. Work quickly and handle as little as possible to keep the pastry cool.
  • Next wrap the pastry ball in cling film and chill in the fridge for 20 minutes.
Clean out the processor ready for the frangipane.
(Tip: working with cold or chilled ingredients helps to keep the pastry light and crumbly. Resting pastry in the fridge for at least 20 minutes helps to prevent shrinking in the oven)

To make the frangipane

  • For the frangipane the butter needs to be at room temperature. Place 230g soft butter and 230g caster sugar into the processor and blend for at least 5 minutes or until pale and creamy.
  • Next whisk together the eggs and gradually add to the creamed butter and sugar whilst continuing to blend. Add a spoonful of ground almonds every now again to help prevent the mixture from splitting.

  • Once all the egg has been combined add the remaining ground almond and all the flour. Blend for a further minute until smooth. Set to one side ready to add to the pastry case later.

To make the Bakewell tart.

  • Prepare your tin by coating the surface with butter and sprinkling over icing sugar - Tap off any excess. Ensure the oven is on and up to temp at 200 degrees C.
  • Flour the work surface and rolling pin. Take the pastry from the fridge, unwrap and start to carefully roll out.
  • Try to roll the pastry to the shape of your tin. The pastry needs to be slightly bigger so that it can be placed up the sides of the tin.
  • When rolled out to size carefully roll the pastry around the rolling pin and transfer to the tin. Roll back out and then gently shape the pastry to the base of the tin. Any cracks or holes in the pastry can be easily repaired by pushing the pastry back together or filling gaps with excess bits of pastry. However, try not to over handle.
  • Next place the raspberry jam in a bowl and mix to loosen it. Carefully spread the jam across the base of the pastry ensuring it goes all the way into the corners.
  • Now take the frangipane filling and pour over the jam. Fill the tart tin up to about ¾ full and no more. The frangipane will rise in the oven and will spill over if too much is added.
  • Scatter flaked almonds over the surface of the frangipane then place the tart in the centre of the preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes. Check at 25 minutes - the tart is done when a skewer comes out of the frangipane clean.
  • Once the Bakewell tart is cooked, leave to cool for a few minutes before removing from the tin.
  • Decorate with icing and serve with fresh raspberries.

Nutrition

Serving: 126g | Calories: 514kcal | Carbohydrates: 56.8g | Protein: 7.4g | Fat: 34.2g | Saturated Fat: 15.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2.9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 80mg | Sugar: 44.9g

The post Bakewell Tart appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/bakewell-tart/feed/ 0
Italian Chicken Cacciatore https://properfoodie.com/italian-chicken-cacciatore/ https://properfoodie.com/italian-chicken-cacciatore/#comments Sat, 04 May 2019 16:50:54 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1956 Italian chicken cacciatore flavoured with rosemary and olives. A really simple and healthy chicken breast one pot, with all the ingredients of an authentic hunters style stew. Best cooked long and slow either in the oven, slow cooker, pressure cooker, one pot or any other preferred method of slow cooking. Chicken Cacciatore Chicken cacciatore is...

Read More

The post Italian Chicken Cacciatore appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Italian chicken cacciatore flavoured with rosemary and olives. A really simple and healthy chicken breast one pot, with all the ingredients of an authentic hunters style stew. Best cooked long and slow either in the oven, slow cooker, pressure cooker, one pot or any other preferred method of slow cooking.

Italian chicken cacciatore

Chicken Cacciatore

Chicken cacciatore is a proper Italian classic and just like spag bol (ragu), risotto and pizza, its a dish that most British households are happy to adopt. Even in the warmer months this easy chicken cacciatore can be such a delight at the end of the day. It may be a hearty stew but the aromatic and earthy flavours of olives and rosemary means it will fit well with a herbed rice dish or some buttered new potatoes. If it does happen to be freezing outside and blowing a gale - then of course this just has to served with a huge pile of creamy mash potatoes. Either way, you're sorted with a fantastic meal.

Italian Chicken stew

Why is it called chicken cacciatore?

This simple Italian chicken stew goes back to the roots of Italy, when hunters used to make this dish with the basic ingredients they had to hand. In Italian 'cacciatore' means 'hunter' and so this dish is sometimes referred to as hunters chicken stew. Hunters style means to be prepared with onions, tomatoes, mushrooms, herbs and sometimes wine. I'm assuming the 'sometimes' means that wine was added when it was available - so, of course, in my version there is plenty of wine 🙂

What wine goes with chicken cacciatore?

As cacciatore is Italian it would be best to make with an Italian wine. My all time favourite Italian wine is Valpolicella, in particular the valpolicella amarone. Ben and I got married in this region of Italy and had this wine served at our wedding breakfast along with a fantastic amarone risotto. The Valpolicalla classico, ripasso or amarone would work well in this dish due to the robust, rich flavours. However, a full bodied montepulciano or  sangiovese would also work really well. If you don't have an Italian wine to hand then any other full bodied wine will be fine, perhaps try with a malbec or strong merlot.

Chicken stew

What is traditionally served with this dish?

Traditionally an Italian chicken casserole is served with fresh pasta - of course. Usually spaghetti, tagliatelle or fettuccine. However, as mentioned earlier, I tend to go with something that will match the time of year. As we are now heading into summer I like to make this dish with herbed rice, which is long grain and wild rice mixed with sea salt and freshly chopped parsley.

How long will it last in the fridge?

A chicken dish will last 1 to 2 days in the fridge depending on how fresh the chicken was when it was cooked. Chicken cacciatore can also be frozen in a sealed container, but it must be cooled first. Freeze for up to 3 months and thoroughly defrost before heating through until piping hot.

Italian chicken casserole

Serve

Serve this dish with your preferred side and top with fresh parsley. Enjoy!

📖 Recipe

chicken cacciatore
Print

Italian Chicken Cacciatore

Easy Chicken cacciatore, a slow cooked, Italian, red wine chicken stew. With all the ingredients of an authentic hunters style stew.
Course Dinner, evening meal, tea
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 418kcal

Ingredients

For the Chicken Stew:

  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 750 g Chicken breast (4 breast)
  • 2 tablespoon Plain flour
  • 200 g Shallots, peeled and left whole (20 Shallots or small onions)
  • 2 Cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 200 ml Italian full bodied red wine
  • 160 g Baby tomatoes
  • 2 tins chopped tomatoes
  • 2 tablespoon Tomato puree
  • 160 g mushrooms, roughly chopped into quarters
  • 3 Sprigs of fresh rosemary
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • 1 Handful Green and black whole olives, pitted
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • 1 Handful Fresh chopped parsley to garnish

Instructions

  • If slow cooking in the oven, pre-heat the oven to 170 degrees C. Place a casserole dish on the stove top and heat up 2 tablespoon olive oil on a medium heat.
  • Slice the chicken breasts into large chunks (I cut each breast into 3), season with salt and pepper and dust evenly with 2 tablespoon plain flour. When the oil is hot; place the chicken chunks in the casserole dish and fry on each side for around 3-4 minutes, or until golden brown. The flour from the chicken will stick to the base of the dish and begin to turn brown - don't panic - leave this for the moment.
  • Remove the chicken and place in a bowl and set to one side. With the casserole dish still on a medium add the peeled whole shallots and chopped garlic. Add more olive oil if needed. Cook for a minute or so before adding the red wine. The wine should sizzle as it enters the pan and loosen the brown flour from the base. Use a wooden spoon to fully remove all the flour (deglaze).
  • Once the wine has reduced by at least half; add 160g whole baby tomatoes, 2 tins of chopped tomatoes, and 2 tablespoon tomato puree. Mix well and bring to a simmer. 
  • Once simmering add 160g chopped mushrooms, 3 springs of rosemary, 2 bay leaves and a handful of green and black pitted olives. Stir well and simmer for a further minute or so.
  • Next return the pre cooked chicken to the casserole dish and stir in well. Bring to the boil then clamp on a lid and place in the middle of the oven for 50mins - 1hr. Alternatively transfer to a slow cooker and cook on medium for 3 hours.
  • Check the stew after 50 minutes. If it appears ready then taste and season with salt and pepper. 
  • Serve the stew with herbed rice or mash or pasta

Nutrition

Serving: 629g | Calories: 418kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 50.1g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.6g | Sodium: 720mg | Sugar: 11.8g

The post Italian Chicken Cacciatore appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/italian-chicken-cacciatore/feed/ 1
Hungarian Mushroom Soup https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/#respond Sun, 19 May 2019 07:00:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10104 Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love! What is in a Rustic Hungarian Mushroom Soup? Hungarian mushroom soup is a rich, creamy mushroom recipe, which includes a good helping of Hungary’s most treasured spice: paprika. The combination of chunky mushrooms and sweet, peppery...

Read More

The post Hungarian Mushroom Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love!

hungarian soup

What is in a Rustic Hungarian Mushroom Soup?

Hungarian mushroom soup is a rich, creamy mushroom recipe, which includes a good helping of Hungary’s most treasured spice: paprika.

The combination of chunky mushrooms and sweet, peppery paprika produces a robust, earthy and flavoursome soup that is just crying out for a dollop of sour cream!

What is in Creamy Hungarian mushroom soup?

This soup uses just a few common ingredients:

  • Butter
  • Onion 
  • Mushrooms (I use closed cup and shiitake mushrooms)
  • Plain flour
  • 2 ½ tsps. paprika (I use standard paprika, but use Hungarian if you can get hold of it)
  • White wine
  • Good quality vegetable stock
  • Soy sauce
  • Semi skimmed milk
  • Soured cream
  • Lemon juice
  • Dried or fresh dill
  • Salt and pepper
  • Fresh parsley
  • Extra sour cream for topping

RECIPE TIP: Although the dish is titled Hungarian Mushroom Soup, it is not essential to use Hungarian paprika. Standard paprika will work fine. However, the use of authentic Hungarian paprika, which has a deep red colour and sweeter flavour, would undoubtedly produce a richer, sweeter soup.

Ingredients for hungarian mushroom soup

How to prepare Hungarian mushroom soup

  1. In a large pan, fry the onions in butter until soft, then add the mushrooms and cook for another 2 minutes.how to make hungarian soup
  2. When the mushrooms start to soften, sprinkle with flour and paprika and mix in well.add flour and paprika to mushrooms
  3. Next, add the white wine and scrape up any bits of flour/paprika stuck to the base of the pan. Then gradually add the stock, milk and soy sauce and stir continually, until the soup starts to boil and thicken.add soy sauce to the soup
  4. Take the soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding the sour cream, then stir in well. (IMPORTANT NOTEadding the sour cream whilst still on the heat will cause it to curdle!)add sour cream
  5. Add the lemon juice, dill, and seasoning to taste.add lemon juice and dill
  6. Serve with freshly chopped parsley and extra dollops of sour cream.season and serve with fresh parsley

Can you freeze this soup?

Yes, Hungarian mushroom soup can be frozen. Allow to fully cool before transferring to an airtight container. Freeze for up to 3 months and defrost thoroughly before reheating. Reheat in a pan and ensure the soup is piping hot throughout before serving.

STORING TIP: Freshly made soup will also keep in the fridge, in a sealed container, for 2 days.

mushroom soup

What to Serve with this recipe?

An indulgent dish like this definitely requires an indulgent pairing and something that you can dunk into all that creamy, mushroomy goodness!

Without a doubt, this soup pairs well with fully loaded sandwiches. Any kind of grilled cheese will work well, and in particular, a Mushroom grilled cheese sandwich would pair up amazingly. You could also try this soup with Paprika chicken wraps or a fully loaded Beef brisket burrito!

mushroom soup with paprika and soured cream

Grab yourself a massive bowl and get ready for a delicious creamy and simple soup recipe like you’ve never tasted before! Enjoy!

Other soups you might like:

📖 Recipe

hungarian mushroom soup
Print

Hungarian Mushroom Soup

Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love!
Course Appetizer, Main Course, Soup, starter
Cuisine hungarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 214.5kcal

Ingredients

  • 30 g butter
  • 150 g Onion finely chopped
  • 500 g mushrooms I used closed cup and shiitake
  • 3 tablespoon plain flour
  • 2 ½ teaspoon paprika I used standard, but use Hungarian if you can get hold of it
  • 100 ml white wine
  • 300 ml good quality vegetable stock
  • 3 tablespoon light soy sauce
  • 200 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 3 tablespoon soured cream
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • 3 teaspoon dried dill
  • Salt and pepper
  • 20 g chopped parsley
  • Extra soured cream for topping

Instructions

  • In a large pan melt the butter and fry the onions until soft. Next add the mushrooms and stir fry for a further 2 minutes.
  • When the mushrooms start to soften sprinkle with flour and paprika and mix in well.
  • Next add the white wine and scrape up any bits of flour/paprika that are stuck to the base of the pan. Once the wine has reduced by half, gradually add the stock, milk and soy sauce and stir continually until the soup starts to boil and thicken.
  • Take the soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding the soured cream then stir in well. (Note - adding the soured cream whilst still on the heat will cause it to curdle).
  • Finally, stir in the dill and lemon juice and season to taste.
  • Serve with freshly chopped parsley and extra blobs of soured cream.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 363g | Calories: 214.5kcal | Carbohydrates: 17.9g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 11.9g | Saturated Fat: 7.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2.6g | Sodium: 880mg | Sugar: 9.9g

I first shared this Hungarian Mushroom Soup recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

The post Hungarian Mushroom Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/feed/ 0
Clam Chowder (Recipe video + Step-by-Step guide) https://properfoodie.com/clam-chowder/ https://properfoodie.com/clam-chowder/#respond Tue, 21 May 2019 23:22:43 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10217 FEATURED AD FOR THE FISH SOCIETY. Creamy clam chowder made with meretrix frozen clams, chunky potato and smokey bacon. Served with fresh parsley and pieces of soft sourdough bread for dipping. This delicious clam chowder soup recipe is my favourite way to enjoy clams and has been directly inspired by the clam chowder on Fisherman's...

Read More

The post Clam Chowder (Recipe video + Step-by-Step guide) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
FEATURED AD FOR THE FISH SOCIETY. Creamy clam chowder made with meretrix frozen clams, chunky potato and smokey bacon. Served with fresh parsley and pieces of soft sourdough bread for dipping. This delicious clam chowder soup recipe is my favourite way to enjoy clams and has been directly inspired by the clam chowder on Fisherman's Wharf.

Clam chowder recipe

Please note that this post contains affiliate links to a product I am recommending on the Fish Society website, which means if you click a link and then go on to purchase a product, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. If you do click and buy – Thank you for helping in the continuation of this blog, it really means a lot!! I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

Clam Chowder Recipe

There are a handful of recipes that have stayed with me since travelling around the world in 2012. Clam chowder in a sourdough bread bowl from Fishermans Wharf in San Francisco is one of these.

Boudin Clam Chowder in sourdough bread bowl

Surely, the most luxurious soup there is. Its rich and creamy, and chocker full of potatoes and fresh clams. There are, of course, a couple of other stand out dishes from our travels; mainly, Thai green curry and Thai red curry, and of course not forgetting the incredible Amarone risotto we had for our wedding breakfast starter in Italy. But, none of these were served to us in a freshly baked sourdough bread bowl or made with clams that had been in the sea just a few hours earlier. So clearly, this dish is a winner in many respects.

Fishermans wharf San Fransisco

How many types of Clam chowder are there?

There are two types of clam chowder. The clam chowder we had in San Francisco is known as a New England clam chowder or Boston clam chowder. Typically the New England clam chowder is white, creamy and made with potatoes. The other type is the Manhattan clam chowder which, is red and made with tomatoes - a recipe for another time perhaps.

one pan clam chowder

What is clam chowder made of?

This clam chowder recipe is a mixture of onions, potatoes, bacon, white wine, milk, herbs and cream. The main ingredient is of course clams! I've used white whole-shell meretrix clams, very kindly provided by the lovely people over at The Fish Society.

Who are The Fish Society?

The fish society is an online fish monger, supplying the whole of the UK and beyond, into Europe and even the US. Fish lands in the UK fishing ports and is auctioned on day one and on day two its frozen by The Fish Society, ready to be shipped out to customers. Their products are frozen soon after being caught which, maintains the freshness of the fish and ensures that they can supply the widest possible variety.

Living in a small town, nowhere near to the sea, good quality and wide varieties of fish can be hard to come by. So I absolutely love the idea of a online fish monger delivering quality, frozen fish to my front door. Especially when it means I can get hold of a bag full of clams for under a tenner or even order a bit of lobster if it takes my fancy!!

Clam Chowder Ingredients

To make clam chowder you will need a few basic ingredients:

  • 1kg frozen whole shell clams
  • Chopped smoked bacon
  • Butter
  • Onion
  • Garlic clove
  • Potatoes
  • Flour
  • White wine
  • Semi skimmed milk
  • Bay leaves
  • Sprigs of fresh thyme
  • Cream
  • Fresh parsley
  • Sourdough bread to serve

clam chowder and sourdough

How do you make homemade clam chowder?

  1. If using pre cooked frozen meretrix clams from The Fish Society, remove these from the freezer at least 6 hours before preparing the dish and leave on the side to fully defrost. If using canned clams or fresh clams no preparation is required.
  2. Pan fry 50g chopped smoked bacon until golden. Remove half of the bacon and set to one side for a topping later on.fry bacon until golden
  3. With the remaining bacon still in the pan add 50g butter and melt. Then add 1 chopped onion and 1 clove of minced garlic. Pan fry on medium until soft then add 300g of cubed potatoes and continue to stir fry for another 5 minutes.add butter onions and potatoes
  4. Next add 2 tablespoon of plain flour to the onion and potato mix, which will help to thicken the chowder along with the starch from the potatoes. Stir in and then add the wine. Use the wine to deglaze the pan (scrape bits off the bottom). When the wine has reduced by half start to gradually add the milk, whilst continually stirring.add white wine and gradually add milk
  5. Once all the milk has been added bring the chowder to the boil then place on the lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are cooked.
  6. If using fresh raw clams cook these now until the shells open. Discard any unopened shells. Remove cooked clams from their shells and save a few shells for decoration later.
  7. If using canned clams or the pre cooked, frozen meretrix clams then theres no need to cook these. Just remove the shells from the defrosted meretrix clams and save a few shells to use as decoration later.
  8. Once the potatoes are soft add the cooked clams to the chowder. Bring the chowder back to a simmer and cook for a couple of minutes to ensure the clams are fully heated through.remove cooked clams from their shells and add to the chowder
  9. Take the chowder off the heat and allow to cool for a couple of minute before stirring in the cream. IMPORTANT TIP: don't add the cream whilst the chowder is still on the heat as this will cause the cream to curdle.take off heat and stir in the cream
  10. Add any saved shells for decoration and then top with bacon and freshly chopped parsley. Serve with sourdough bread.add in shells for decoration then top with bacon and fresh parsley

What can I eat with clam chowder?

If you are going to eat anything with clam chowder I highly recommend the traditional sourdough. Either large pieces to dunk or if you're feeling adventurous, hollow out a loaf of sourdough and use this as your bowl. A wonderful tradition created by the Boudin bakery, which can be found at the start of Fisherman's Wharf, San Francisco.

Clam chowder in sourdough bowl at boudin

How do you store this recipe?

Once the clam chowder is fully cooled transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days. To reheat transfer to a large pan and slowly heat on the stove. Stir continually and cook until the chowder is just about simmering to prevent the cream from curdling. If you've used fresh or canned clams you can freeze the chowder for up to 3 months. Thoroughly defrost before reheating as above. If using frozen clams you should only refrigerate the chowder - do not freeze.

Clam chowder with frozen clams

For more fishy inspiration check out The Fish Society website. Enjoy the chowder! - And if you haven't already, and you happen to be in the area, definitely check out clam chowder at Boudins Bakery in San Fran!

debbie and ben in san fransisco

Love creamy chowder? Why not try this creamy Hungarian mushroom soup or this Creamy mushroom pasta.

Other Fish Recipes

📖 Recipe

Print

Clam Chowder

Creamy clam chowder made with meretrix frozen clams, chunky potato and smokey bacon. Served with fresh parsley and pieces of soft sourdough bread for dipping. This delicious clam chowder soup recipe is my favourite way to enjoy clams and has been directly inspired by the clam chowder on Fisherman's Wharf.
Course Appetizer, fish, main meal, Soup, starter, starter or main
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 445.7kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 kg frozen whole shell clams alternatively use fresh or canned
  • 125 g Chopped smoked bacon
  • 50 g Butter
  • 160 g Onion
  • 1 Garlic clove
  • 300 g Potatoes peeled and cubed
  • 2 tablespoon Plain flour
  • 100 ml White wine
  • 200 ml Semi skimmed milk
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • 3 Sprigs of fresh thyme
  • Water - add until happy with consistency
  • 100 ml Cream
  • 20 g Fresh parsley
  • Sourdough bread to serve

Instructions

  • If using pre cooked frozen meretrix clams from The Fish Society, remove these from the freezer at least 6 hours before preparing the dish and leave on the side to fully defrost. If using canned clams or fresh clams no preparation is required.
  • Pan fry 50g chopped smoked bacon until golden. Remove half of the bacon and set to one side for a topping later on.
    fry bacon until golden
  • With the remaining bacon still in the pan add 50g butter and melt. Then add 1 chopped onion and 1 clove of minced garlic. Pan fry on medium until soft then add 300g of cubed potatoes and continue to stir fry for another 5 minutes.
    add butter onions and potatoes
  • Next add 2 tablespoon of plain flour to the onion and potato mix, which will help to thicken the chowder along with the starch from the potatoes. Stir in and then add the wine. Use the wine to deglaze the pan (scrape bits off the bottom). When the wine has reduced by half start to gradually add the milk, whilst continually stirring.
    add white wine and gradually add milk
  • Once all the milk has gone into the pan, add the bay leaves and sprigs of thyme. Check consistency and add 100-200ml of water if the soup appears too thick.
    add bay and thyme and season
  • Bring the chowder to the boil then place on the lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are cooked.
  • If using fresh raw clams now is the time to get these into boiling water and cook until the shells open. Discard any unopened shells. Remove cooked clams from their shells and save a few shells for decoration later.
  • If using canned clams or the pre cooked, frozen meretrix clams then theres no need to cook these. Just remove the shells from the defrosted meretrix clams and save a few shells to use as decoration later.
  • Once the potatoes are soft add the cooked clams to the chowder. Check consistency again and add water if required. Bring the chowder back to a simmer and cook for a couple of minutes to ensure the clams are fully heated through.
    remove cooked clams from their shells and add to the chowder
  • Take the chowder off the heat and allow to cool for a couple of minute before stirring in the cream.
    take off heat and stir in the cream

IMPORTANT TIP:

  • don't add the cream whilst the chowder is still on the heat as this will cause the cream to curdle.

Serve:

  • Add any saved shells for decoration and then top with bacon and freshly chopped parsley. Serve with sourdough bread.
    add in shells for decoration then top with bacon and fresh parsley

Recipe tip:

  • If you are using frozen, cooked clams and you don't have time to defrost them you can add the frozen clams in their shells directly to the chowder. This of course means that all clams will be in shells when you serve the dish. - And although this looks pretty it makes eating this recipe a little more time consuming. You will also need a bigger pan and the clams should be simmered for longer to ensure they are fully reheated.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 338g | Calories: 445.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 30.7g | Saturated Fat: 17.6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8.6g | Sodium: 600mg | Sugar: 7.2g

PIN FOR LATER

Creamy clam chowder; New England style. Made with frozen meretrix clams, smoked bacon and a creamy white wine sauce

The post Clam Chowder (Recipe video + Step-by-Step guide) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/clam-chowder/feed/ 0
Chicken Noodle Soup https://properfoodie.com/chicken-noodle-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/chicken-noodle-soup/#respond Fri, 12 Nov 2021 14:17:56 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10082 Homemade chicken noodle soup is a one pan soup recipe made with juicy chicken thighs, wholesome chopped veggies and a flavourful broth. This easy chicken noodle soup is easy to make from scratch and will quickly become a weeknight favourite! 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Chicken noodle soup is a great recipe for using up...

Read More

The post Chicken Noodle Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade chicken noodle soup is a one pan soup recipe made with juicy chicken thighs, wholesome chopped veggies and a flavourful broth. This easy chicken noodle soup is easy to make from scratch and will quickly become a weeknight favourite!

A large pan of chicken noodle soup with chopped vegetables and fresh parsley.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Chicken noodle soup is a great recipe for using up the week’s leftovers. Not only is this soup recipe full of vegetables its also perfect for using the more budget-friendly cuts of chicken, like chicken legs and thighs.

The recipe below uses three large chicken thighs with the skins on, and chopped up onion, carrot and celery. Cooked up in large pan, these ingredients combine to create a full flavoured broth, perfect for holding noodles.

🥘 Ingredients

To make chicken noodle soup you will need:

  • Skin on chicken thighs
  • Oil and dried rosemary
  • Minced garlic
  • Onion chopped
  • Carrot chopped
  • Celery chopped
  • Stock cube in water or retail pre-made stock
  • Bay leaves
  • Dried medium egg noodles
  • Salt and pepper
  • Fresh parsley

Ingredient notes

Chicken: Any cut of chicken will work well in this recipe from leftover Sunday dinner chicken to freshly cut chicken breast. If you are using cooked leftover chicken, this can just be added at the end.

Vegetables: Onion, carrot and celery are the basic veg that add a great flavour to any one pot recipe. I recommend using at least these three vegetable. But you have any other leftover veg lying around then definitely chop it up and pop it in as well.

Stock: Choose a good quality stock as this will make the base of soup.

Noodles: Medium noodles are a good option for this recipe as they hold together well in the soup.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pan fry the chicken thighs in oil and rosemary until skin is browned, then remove the thighs from the pan and set to one side. 
  2. In the same pan add the minced garlic, chopped onion, carrot and celery and fry until soft.
  3. Add the stock to the vegetables and bring to a simmer. When simmering return the thighs to the pan along with 2 bay leaves, pop on the lid and cook for 20 minutes.
  4. After 20 minutes, remove the thighs from the pan. Add the dried noodles to the broth and simmer until noodles are cooked through. Separate the chicken meat from the skin and bones and then shred the meat. Skin and bones can be discarded.Four images showing how to make chicken noodle soup for steps 1-4.
  5. Once the noodles are cooked stir in the cooked shredded chicken and season to taste.
  6. Top with fresh parsley and serve.add noodles

💭 Expert tips

  • If using pre cooked leftover or rotisserie chicken; skip step 1 and instead of adding the thighs in step 3 just move to adding the noodles. Shred your cooked chicken and add at the end.
  • The stock can reduce down quite quickly, so have extra hot water available to top up the soup as it cooks.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Does chicken soup help clear colds?

Some studies, like this study from the American College of CHEST Physicians, show that chicken noodle soup can help clear nasal passageways, which is helpful when you have a cold. This is thought to be due to the heat, the aroma, and the taste.
This recipe is also generally high in protein, vitamins and minerals, and so provides a well-balanced meal promoting general wellness.

Is this soup gluten free?

Egg noodles and some brands of stock can contain gluten. For a gluten free recipe replace the noodles with rice noodles and use a gluten free stock.

How to store?

Completely cool then store in air tight container in the fridge for up to 3 days or the freezer for up to 3 months. Noodles tend to not freeze and reheat well. So if you plan to freeze this recipe, leave out the noodles. Instead, add the noodles in when you have defrosted and are reheating the soup. Defrost thoroughly and reheat in a pan until piping hot.

Leftover shredded chicken with noodles and chicken broth soup.

🍵 Other soup recipes:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

chicken noodle soup
Print

Chicken Noodle Soup

Homemade chicken noodle soup is a one pan soup recipe made with juicy chicken thighs, wholesome chopped veggies and a flavourful broth. This easy chicken noodle soup is easy to make from scratch and will quickly become a weeknight favourite!
Course Appetizer, Main Course, Soup, starter
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 520kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 500 g Skin on chicken thighs or chicken breasts, leftover chicken or rotisserie
  • 1 tablespoon oil
  • ½ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 3 cloves minced garlic
  • 120 g chopped onion 1 medium onion
  • 150 g chopped carrot 2 medium carrots
  • 150 g chopped celery 4 sticks
  • 500 ml chicken stock
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • 180 g dried medium egg noodles
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • 4 tablespoon Fresh parsley

Instructions

  • Pan fry the chicken thighs in oil and rosemary until skin is browned, then remove the thighs from the pan and set to one side.
    500 g Skin on chicken thighs, 1 tablespoon oil, ½ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • In the same pan add the minced garlic, chopped onion, carrot and celery and fry until soft.
    3 cloves minced garlic, 120 g chopped onion, 150 g chopped carrot, 150 g chopped celery
  • Add the stock to the vegetables and bring to a simmer. When simmering return the thighs to the pan along with 2 bay leaves, pop on the lid and cook for 20 minutes.
    500 ml chicken stock, 2 Bay leaves
  • After 20 minutes, remove the thighs from the pan. Add the dried noodles to the broth and simmer until noodles are cooked through. Separate the chicken meat from the skin and bones and then shred the meat. Skin and bones can be discarded.
    180 g dried medium egg noodles
  • Once the noodles are cooked stir in the cooked shredded chicken and season to taste.
    Salt and pepper to taste
  • Top with fresh parsley and serve.
    4 tablespoon Fresh parsley

Video

Notes

Chicken: Any cut of chicken will work well in this recipe from leftover Sunday dinner chicken to freshly cut chicken breast. If using pre cooked leftover or rotisserie chicken; skip step 1 and instead of adding the thighs in step 3 just move to adding the noodles. Shred your cooked chicken and add at the end.
Vegetables: Onion, carrot and celery are the basic veg that add a great flavour to any one pot recipe. I recommend using at least these three vegetable. But you have any other leftover veg lying around then definitely chop it up and pop it in as well.
Stock: Choose a good quality stock as this will make the base of soup. The stock can reduce down quite quickly, so have extra hot water available to top up the soup as it cooks.
Noodles: Medium noodles are a good option for this recipe as they hold together well in the soup.
Does chicken soup help clear colds? Some studies show that chicken noodle soup can help clear nasal passageways, which is helpful when you have a cold. This is thought to be due to the heat, the aroma, and the taste.
This recipe is also generally high in protein, vitamins and minerals, and so provides a well-balanced meal promoting general wellness.
Is this soup gluten free? Egg noodles and some brands of stock can contain gluten. For a gluten free recipe replace the noodles with rice noodles and use a gluten free stock.
How to store? Completely cool then store in air tight container in the fridge for up to 3 days or the freezer for up to 3 months. Noodles tend to not freeze and reheat well. So if you plan to freeze this recipe, leave out the noodles. Instead, add the noodles in when you have defrosted and are reheating the soup. Defrost thoroughly and reheat in a pan until piping hot.

Nutrition

Serving: 476g | Calories: 520kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 28g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 146mg | Sodium: 378mg | Potassium: 752mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 6889IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in Jul 2019. Updated in Nov 2021 with new step by step instructions and expert tips.

I first shared Chicken Noodle Soup on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

The post Chicken Noodle Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chicken-noodle-soup/feed/ 0
Cauliflower soup https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/#respond Fri, 15 Nov 2019 14:40:54 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11419 Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just...

Read More

The post Cauliflower soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just a few simple and healthy ingredients and can be on the table in under 30 minutes.

Cauliflower soup recipe

Can you make this recipe without cream?

Although most soups will benefit tremendously from a big dollop of cream, cauliflower soup is one of those recipes that can manage a velvety, creamy finish all on its own. Admittedly, there is some semi skimmed that goes into this soup recipe, but the rest of that delicious, creaminess is from the cauliflower itself. Give it 20 minutes to simmer in some stock, or 15 minutes to roast in the oven and the soft, fluffy florets will blitz down into an irresistibly, creamy soup in a matter of seconds.

 

Whether you use roasted cauliflower of cauliflower boiled in veggie stock, the results will always be the same - full flavoured and velvety smooth. However, see the end of this post if you are looking to make a cream of cauliflower soup recipe.

healthy cauliflower soup recipe

Ingredients for cauliflower soup

This easy soup recipe requires just a few simple ingredients, many of which I already had at home:

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 3 large banana shallots (or 6 small) (150g) roughly diced
  • 1 medium cauliflower (600g) leaves removed and chopped into small florets
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 450ml vegetable stock
  • 300ml semi skimmed milk
  • Seasoning
easy cauliflower soup

How to make cauliflower soup

  1. Heat the oil in a large saucepan. Add a clove of finely chopped garlic and 150g of roughly chopped shallots. Fry gently until soft.
  2. Recipe tip: for extra flavour, fry the shallots in the pan until caramelisedfrying chopped garlic and shallots in oil
  3. Next, add the cauliflower florets and half a teaspoon of ground nutmeg.adding cauliflower florets to the fried shallots
  4. Then pour in 450ml of veg stock and 300ml of semi skimmed milk. adding stock to the pan adding semi skimmed milk to the pan
  5. Gently bring the soup to the boil and then cover and simmer for 20 minutes or until cauliflower is soft. soup brought to the boil and covered with a lid
  6. Transfer the contents of the pan to a processor and blend until smooth.
  7. Recipe tip: Add the chunky parts of the soup to the processor first and gradually add the liquid as you blend.
  8. Add more liquid to thin out and reach your desired consistency. cooked soup transferred to a food processor soup blended until smooth
  9. Return the soup to the pan to reheat if necessary, then taste and season.
  10. Recipe tip: For a super smooth soup blend for an extra 2 minutes and then pass soup through a sieve.soup served and seasoned
  11. Serve in bowls with crusty bread.

Different types of cauliflower soup

This recipe is the most basic of soup recipes and is pretty damn good just as it is. However, cauliflower is a versatile vegetable and so if you're looking for a soup with a bit more punch, why not try one of the options below:

How to make cauliflower cheese soup

For cauliflower cheese soup follow the recipe above and after blending return the soup to the pan. Gently reheat the soup and add 50g of grated cheddar (or your preferred hard cheese. Stir well until the cheese has fully melted. For an extra kick stir in a teaspoon of mustard or serve with a dash of Worcestershire sauce.

How to make this soup spicy

Cauliflower is a great vegetable for taking on other flavours and will soak up spices like a sponge. To make a spicy or curry-flavoured cauliflower soup follow the recipe above but coat the cauliflower with spices before adding to the pan. For a spicy kick first coat the uncooked cauliflower florets in half tablespoon oil then mix: 1 teaspoon paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, and ½ teaspoon hot chilli powder. For something a little milder with more of a curry flavour, mix with: 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric and 1 teaspoon ground coriander.

Curried soup is great served with freshly baked naan bread. Its also ideal for bulking out with moroccan ingredients like chickpeas: spiced cauliflower and chickpea soup.

How to make vegan cauliflower soup

To make this recipe vegan, simply replace the milk with plant milk (i.e. - almond milk) or remove the milk completely and replace with extra vegetable stock.

How to make roasted cauliflower soup

Roasted cauliflower gives this soup and extra layer of smokey, nutty flavours, which is especially good combined with the melted cheese or curry spices from the above ideas. Simply coat the raw cauliflower florets in oil (and spices if you like) then roast on a tray in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the edges are just starting to char. Then continue with the recipe above, the only difference being that you will only need to simmer the soup for 10 minutes, rather than 20 minutes, before blending.

Roasted cauliflower is also fantastic in a roasted cauliflower salad.

creamy cauliflower soup

How to make this recipe super creamy

This recipe is one thats creamy all on its own. The mild flavour and soft texture of the cauliflower means that a quick blitz in the blender will give a lusciously creamy result every time. However, if you are looking for extra creaminess or even wanting to call your soup 'cream of cauliflower' then you may want to add in a little cream.

To make this soup a cream of cauliflower recipe simply return your soup to the pan after blending and gently reheat. Once its piping hot remove from the heat and stir in 150ml of double cream, then serve. Alternatively you could stir in 3 tablespoon of soured cream (particularly good if you've made the spicy or curried cauliflower soup), or replace the milk in this recipe with a can of coconut milk for a creamy cauliflower and coconut soup - delicious.

Cauliflower soup without cream

Can you freeze this recipe?

This soup recipe can be frozen for up to 3 months. Once your soup is fully cooled transfer to sealable containers and pop into the freezer. Defrost thoroughly before reheating, either on the side for a few hours or in the microwave for 5 - 10 minutes with lid removed. Then gently reheat in a pan until the soup just about boils.

Other homemade soup recipes to try:

📖 Recipe

cauliflower soup
Print

Cauliflower Soup

Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just a few simple and healthy ingredients and can be on the table in under 30 minutes.
Course Appetizer, starter or main
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 114.7kcal

Equipment

  • Large saucepan
  • Food processor or hand blender

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 3 large banana shallots or 6 small (150g) roughly diced
  • 1 medium cauliflower 600g leaves removed and chopped into small florets
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 450 ml vegetable stock
  • 300 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Seasoning and crusty bread to serve

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large saucepan. Add a clove of finely chopped garlic and 150g of roughly chopped shallots. Fry gently until soft.
  • Recipe tip: for extra flavour, fry the shallots in the pan until caramelised
    frying chopped garlic and shallots in oil
  • Next, add the cauliflower florets and half a teaspoon of ground nutmeg.
    adding ground nutmeg to the soup pan
  • Then pour in 450ml of veg stock and 300ml of semi skimmed milk.
    adding semi skimmed milk to the pan
  • Gently bring the soup to the boil and then cover and simmer for 20 minutes or until cauliflower is soft.
    soup brought to the boil and covered with a lid
  • Transfer the contents of the pan to a processor and blend until smooth.
    cooked soup transferred to a food processor
  • Recipe tip: Add the chunky parts of the soup to the processor first and gradually add the liquid as you blend. Add more liquid to thin out the soup and stop when you reach your desired consistency.
    soup blended until smooth
  • Return the soup to the pan to reheat if necessary, then taste and season.
    soup served and seasoned
  • Recipe tip: For a super smooth soup blend for an extra 2 minutes and then pass soup through a sieve.
  • Serve in bowls with crusty bread.

Video

Notes

How to make cauliflower cheese soup

For cauliflower cheese soup follow the recipe above and after blending return the soup to the pan. Gently reheat the soup and add 50g of grated cheddar (or your preferred hard cheese. Stir well until the cheese has fully melted. For an extra kick stir in a teaspoon of mustard or serve with a dash of Worcestershire sauce.

How to make spicy cauliflower soup

Cauliflower is a great vegetable for taking on other flavours and will soak up spices like a sponge. To make a spicy or curry-flavoured cauliflower soup follow the recipe above but coat the cauliflower with spices before adding to the pan. For a spicy kick first coat the uncooked cauliflower florets in half tablespoon oil then mix: 1 teaspoon paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, and ½ teaspoon hot chilli powder. For something a little milder with more of a curry flavour, mix with: 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric and 1 teaspoon ground coriander. Curried cauliflower soup is great served with freshly baked naan bread. Its also ideal for bulking out with moroccan ingredients like chickpeas: spiced cauliflower and chickpea soup.

How to make vegan cauliflower soup

To make this recipe vegan, simply replace the milk with plant milk (i.e. - almond milk) or remove the milk completely and replace with extra vegetable stock.

How to make roasted cauliflower soup

To make roasted cauliflower soup, simply coat the raw cauliflower florets in oil (and spices if you like) then roast on a tray in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the edges are just starting to char. Then continue with the recipe above, the only difference being that you will only need to simmer the soup for 10 minutes, rather than 20 minutes, before blending.

How to make cauliflower soup creamy

To make cream of cauliflower soup simply return your soup to the pan after blending and gently reheat. Once its piping hot remove from the heat and stir in 150ml of double cream, then serve. Alternatively you could stir in 3 tablespoon of soured cream (particularly good if you've made the spicy or curried cauliflower soup), or replace the milk in this recipe with a can of coconut milk for a creamy cauliflower and coconut soup - delicious.

Can you freeze cauliflower soup?

Cauliflower soup can be frozen for up to 3 months. Once your soup is fully cooled transfer to sealable containers and pop into the freezer. Defrost thoroughly before reheating, either on the side for a few hours or in the microwave for 5 - 10 minutes with lid removed. Then gently reheat in a pan until the soup just about boils.
Nutritional info cauliflower soup

Nutrition

Serving: 378g | Calories: 114.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 11.7g | Protein: 9.6g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1.5g | Sodium: 280mg | Fiber: 3.2g | Sugar: 9.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Creamy cauliflower soup recipe

The post Cauliflower soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/feed/ 0
Chocolate Muffins https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-muffins/ https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-muffins/#comments Mon, 23 Dec 2019 15:49:17 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11735 Brownie chocolate muffins topped with vanilla mascarpone cream. These chocolate muffins are perfect for when you want chocolate brownies but don't want the hassle of cutting up a huge crumbly slab of the stuff. Theres no worry over burnt edges and you can even add a bit of cream frosting.   This is the best brownie...

Read More

The post Chocolate Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Brownie chocolate muffins topped with vanilla mascarpone cream. These chocolate muffins are perfect for when you want chocolate brownies but don't want the hassle of cutting up a huge crumbly slab of the stuff. Theres no worry over burnt edges and you can even add a bit of cream frosting.  

Chocolate muffins

This is the best brownie recipe if your after super quick muffins with plenty of chocolate. These muffins have all the qualities of chocolate brownies but are so much quicker and easier to serve up. They also allow for a bit of extra decoration if you are wanting to make chocolate brownies for handing out at a special occasion.

Chocolate muffins for 'bun in the oven' baby announcement

My own special reason for creating this delicious collection of chocolate muffins was to announce my pregnancy - 'Bun in the oven style'. I just had to do something food related 🙂

Baby boy Jones due 21st April 2020!! Very exciting 🙂 

Bun in the oven baby announcement

Is chocolate brownie, cake?

Chocolate brownie is dense and crumbly and so considered to be a bar or biscuit rather than cake. Usually chocolate brownie is eaten with your fingers as whereas cake is eaten with a fork or spoon.

What do you bake brownies in?

If you are making chocolate brownie in a slab that you can cut up into portions its best to use a square or rectangular cake tin (9 inch). Have a look at this chocolate brownies recipe for further details. However, in the case of this recipe the chocolate brownie mix is baked in muffin cases. Brownie muffins have the same texture and density as a normal piece of brownie and so will come out slightly heavier than a normal sponge muffin or cupcake.

TIP: Make sure the brownies are fully cooled before removing from the muffin cases. If the muffins are still warm the brownie will stick to the case and break up as you try to remove it.

Easy brownie recipe

Chocolate for brownies

The best chocolate for making brownie chocolate muffins is cooking chocolate and cocoa powder. Cooking chocolate will melt down smoothly and quickly and the cocoa powder will provide that intense flavour brownies are so well known for. Extra chocolate can also be added to brownies - and why not. Brownies are all about the chocolate and I love to add in white chocolate chips.

Brownie cakes

Ingredients for chocolate brownies

  • 220g Unsalted butter
  • 280g Cooking chocolate (milk)
  • 4 Medium eggs
  • 300g Golden caster sugar
  • 100g Plain flour
  • 100g cocoa powder
  • 100g white chocolate chips (optional) (or add milk chocolate chips/chunks or chopped hazelnuts)

How to make chocolate muffins

These decadent brownie chocolate muffins are made with an easy brownie recipe, which takes minutes to mix together: 

  1. Pre heat oven to 180 degrees C (fan). Cut up the butter into chunks and add to a microwavable bowl, along with 280g cooking milk chocolate broken into chunks. cubed butter and cooking chocolate in a bowl
  2. Microwave in 30 second bursts, stirring in between until fully melted. Place melted chocolate to one side to cool slightly.
    NOTE: with the butter mixed in it won’t take long for this to fully melt - so make sure you keep an eye on it and don’t over heat.butter and chocolate melted in a bowl
  3. In a large mixing bowl whisk together 4 eggs and and 300g sugar. The mixing of sugar and eggs is known as a sabayon and a proper sabayon is achieved by whisking quickly and evenly until the mix turns pale and begins to ribbon with the movement of the whisk.whisking together eggs and sugar - known as a sabayon
  4. Next pour the melted chocolate into the sabayon and stir in well.stirring melted chocolate into the whisked sugar and eggs
  5. Sift in the flour and the cocoa powder and gently stir in with a spatula until fully combined.
    NOTE: the mixture will be very stiff and seem quite dry but keep stirring and the mixture will come together.folding flour and cocoa into the brownie mix
  6. Add the white chocolate chips and stir in well to distribute evenly.stirring white chocolate chips into brownie mix
  7. Place muffin cases into the muffin tin then spoon the brownie mix into the cases. Each case should be filled with around 1 heaped tablespoon of the mixture (case will be ¾ full). Use a second spoon to scrap the mixture into the case. This recipe will be enough to fill around 16 muffin cases.spooning browning mix into muffin cases
  8. Place muffins into the pre heated oven and cook for 25 minutes.
    TIP: cook for 20 minute if you would like the centre of your muffins to be slightly gooey.chocolate muffins fresh out of the oven
  9. Remove from the oven and allow to completely cool. 
    NOTE: Brownies will firm up as they cool - so don’t worry if they seem a bit ‘wobbly’ when you pull them out of the oven.  

Frosting for chocolate brownies

The topping used in this chocolate muffins recipe is a simple vanilla mascarpone cream, with just 4 ingredients and whisked up in seconds. To make Vanilla mascarpone cream you will need:

  • 225g Mascarpone cheese
  • 75ml Double cream
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla bean paste ( or seeds of 1 vanilla pod)
  • Icing sugar to taste
  1. Place the mascarpone, double cream and vanilla in a mixing bowl and stir together until well combined and smooth. Taste and mix in icing sugar to your liking. mascarpone cheese, cream and vanilla in a bowl
  2. Transfer the cream to a piping bag with nozzle and pipe onto the top of completely cooled brownies. NOTE: if brownies aren’t completely cool the cream will melt and run off the muffins.piping mascarpone cream onto chocolate muffins

  3. Dust with cocoa powder and serve.

Frequently asked questions about brownie chocolate muffins

How do you make gooey chocolate muffins?

To make your chocolate muffins slightly gooey in the middle, bake for just 20 minutes instead of the 25 minutes suggested in the recipe. The muffins will look under cooked at this point but they will set as they cool, leaving the middle slightly gooey.

Can you freeze chocolate brownie muffins?

Once baked allow the brownie chocolate muffins to cool completely then wrap in cling film or place in a container with a lid. Freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and allow to defrost on the side over night.

Can you make these chocolate muffins in advance?

Yes these chocolate muffins can be made up to 5 days in advance. Once made, allow to completely cool then store in an air tight container.

Other cake and muffin recipes you might like:

 1 hour to produce recipevegetarian recipeunder 400 calories recipeChristmas Recipe

📖 Recipe

chocolate brownie muffins
Print

Chocolate muffins

Brownie chocolate muffins topped with vanilla mascarpone cream. These chocolate muffins are perfect for when you want chocolate brownies but don't want the hassle of cutting up a huge crumbly slab of the stuff. Theres no worry over burnt edges and you can even add a bit of cream frosting.  
Course Dessert, pudding, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 35 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 16 muffins
Calories 361.2kcal

Equipment

  • Large Microwaveable bowl
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • Muffin tin
  • Muffin cases
  • Piping bag with nozzle for frosting

Ingredients

For the chocolate muffins

  • 220 g Unsalted butter
  • 280 g Cooking chocolate milk
  • 4 Medium eggs
  • 300 g Golden caster sugar
  • 100 g Plain flour
  • 100 g cocoa powder
  • 100 g white chocolate chips optional (or add milk chocolate chips/chunks or chopped hazelnuts)

For the Mascarpone cream frosting

  • 225 g Mascarpone cheese
  • 75 ml Double cream
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla bean paste or seeds of 1 vanilla pod
  • Icing sugar to taste

Instructions

To make the chocolate brownie muffins

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C
  • Cut up the butter into chunks and add to a microwavable bowl, along with 280g cooking milk chocolate broken into chunks. Microwave in 30 second bursts, stirring in between until fully melted.
    NOTE: with the butter mixed in it won’t take long for this to fully melt - so make sure you keep an eye on it and don’t over heat.
    cubed butter and cooking chocolate in a bowl
  • Place melted chocolate to one side to cool slightly
    butter and chocolate melted in a bowl
  • In a large mixing bowl whisk together 4 eggs and and 300g sugar. The mixing of sugar and eggs is known as a sabayon and a proper sabayon is achieved by whisking quickly and evenly until the mix turns pale and begins to ribbon with the movement of the whisk.
    whisking together eggs and sugar - known as a sabayon
  • Next pour the melted chocolate into the sabayon and stir in well.
    stirring melted chocolate into the whisked sugar and eggs
  • Sift in the flour and the cocoa powder and gently stir in with a spatula until fully combined.
    NOTE: the mixture will be very stiff and seem quite dry but keep stirring and the mixture will come together.
    folding flour and cocoa into the brownie mix
  • Add the white chocolate chips and stir in well to distribute evenly.
    stirring white chocolate chips into brownie mix
  • Place muffin cases into the muffin tin then spoon the brownie mix into the cases. Each case should be filled with around 1 heaped tablespoon of the mixture (case will be ¾ full). Use a second spoon to scrap the mixture into the case. This recipe will be enough to fill around 16 muffin cases.
    spooning browning mix into muffin cases
  • Place muffins into the pre heated oven and cook for 25 minutes.
    TIP: cook for 20 minute if you would like the centre of your muffins to be slightly gooey.
  • Remove from the oven and allow to completely cool.
    NOTE: Brownies will firm up as they cool - so don’t worry if they seem a bit ‘wobbly’ when you pull them out of the oven.
    chocolate muffins fresh out of the oven

To make the mascarpone cream topping

  • Place the mascarpone, double cream and vanilla in a mixing bowl and stir together until well combined and smooth. Taste and mix in icing sugar to your liking.
    mascarpone cheese, cream and vanilla in a bowl
  • Transfer the cream to a piping bag with nozzle and pipe onto the top of completely cooled brownies.
    NOTE: if brownies aren’t completely cool the cream will melt and run off the muffins.
    piping mascarpone cream onto chocolate muffins
  • Dust with cocoa powder and serve.

Video

Notes

Nutritional info chocolate muffins

How do you make gooey chocolate muffins?

To make your muffins slightly gooey in the middle, bake for just 20 minutes instead of the 25 minutes suggested in the recipe. The muffins will look under cooked at this point but they will set as they cool, leaving the middle slightly gooey.

Can you freeze chocolate brownie muffins?

Once baked allow the brownie muffins to cool completely then wrap in cling film or place in a container with a lid. Freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and allow to defrost on the side over night.

Can you make these chocolate muffins in advance?

Yes these chocolate muffins can be made up to 5 days in advance. Once made, allow to completely cool then store in an air tight container.
TIP: Make sure the brownies are fully cooled before removing from the muffin cases. If the muffins are still warm the brownie will stick to the case and break up as you try to remove it.

Nutrition

Serving: 84g | Calories: 361.2kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 5.5g | Fat: 21.5g | Saturated Fat: 15.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.4g | Sodium: 40mg | Fiber: 0.7g | Sugar: 33.3g

PIN FOR LATER

chocolate muffins made with a chocolate brownie recipe and topped with vanilla mascarpone cream

The post Chocolate Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-muffins/feed/ 4
Pear Chutney https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/ https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/#comments Mon, 10 Jan 2022 23:54:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5424 Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas...

Read More

The post Pear Chutney appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas chutney or for a lovely foodie gift.

Homemade pear chutney in a small jar with the lid off and a spoonful of chutney to the side.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Brown sugar and ginger spiced pears, poached in cider and reduced to a sweet and spicy chutney. Your cheese and biscuits is crying out for this recipe! This easy homemade chutney recipe is also great for using up a glut of pears or generally making use of and preserving some lovely autumnal fruit. It also makes for a pretty good foodie gift or Christmas present, just preserve in jars and add some tags.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of chutney. To make this spiced pear chutney you will need:

Ingredients to make homemade pear chutney.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Pears: This recipe uses conference pears but any variety of pear will work well in this chutney.

Apples: This recipe uses red eating apples, which keep their shape better than baking apples so results in a chunky textures chutney.

Vinegar: Use a vinegar with at least 5% acetic acid. This will ensure proper preserving of the chutney and prevent spoilage.

Demerara sugar: Sugar of course helps to sweeten the chutney but its also an important part of the preserving process, so don't leave it out.

Cider: Cider gives a fantastic flavour to this pear chutney, however if you'd prefer an alcohol free version just replace the cider with apple juice.

Mixed Spice: This is a ground spice mixture of cinnamon, coriander, caraway seeds, nutmeg, ginger and cloves. For a simple substitute use ½ teaspoon cinnamon and ½ teaspoon nutmeg.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Add chopped shallots to a large pan with a little oil and fry gently until soft.
  2. Next add the chopped pears, apples and ginger to the pan and mix together.
  3. Then add the cider, vinegar, lemon juice, sugar, mixed spice and cinnamon stick. Stir well and bring to the boil.
  4. Simmer for 30 minutes, check and stir occasionally.4 step by step images showing how to make pear chutney for steps 1-4.
  5. After 30 minutes or so, the chutney should have started to thicken. Use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or pear. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  6. Transfer the hot pear chutney to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.2 step by step images showing how to make pear chutney for steps 5-6.
  7. If you plan to eat the chutney that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

💭 Expert tips

  • To test the consistency: Spoon some of the chutney onto a small plate and refrigerate for 5 minutes. If you are happy with the thickness of the cooled chutney you can remove the pan from the heat. If not, continue to simmer if too thin, or add more cider/apple juice if too thick.
  • Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you sterilise jars?

To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.

How to seal the jars?

Place hot pear chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How to store?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of pear chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

What makes chutney a chutney?

Chutney is usually fruits or vegetables preserved in vinegar and sugar.

Which vinegar is best for chutney?

Any vinegar will work well in chutney as long as its contains at least 5% acetic acid, which will kill any bacteria and allow the chutney to be preserved without spoilage. The type of 5% vinegar you choose will be down to taste. For a lighter taste opt for white wine vinegar, for something stronger and sweeter choose an aged balsamic vinegar.

A small jar filled with homemade chutney with a larger jar of chutney in the background.

Other Christmas recipe ideas

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Homemade pear chutney in a small jar with the lid off and a spoonful of chutney to the side.
Print

Pear Chutney

Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas chutney or for a lovely foodie gift.
Course Christmas, condiment, Side Dish
Cuisine British, Christmas
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 110ml jars
Calories 200kcal

Equipment

  • Masher
  • Jam funnel (for transferring chutney to jars)
  • Jars (for storage)

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 4 medium Echalion shallots finely chopped - 300g
  • 3 large conference pears peeled and chopped into 2cm chunks - 650g
  • 2 red Gala apples cored and chopped into 1cm pieces with skins left on - 180g
  • 2 cm piece fresh ginger peeled and finely chopped
  • 350 ml apple cider
  • 75 ml white wine vinegar 5% acetic acid
  • ½ a lemon juiced
  • 250 g demerara sugar
  • 1 teaspoon mixed spice
  • 1 cinnamon stick

Instructions

  • Add chopped shallots to a large pan with a little oil and fry gently until soft.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 4 medium Echalion shallots
  • Next add the chopped pears, apples and ginger to the pan and mix together.
    3 large conference pears, 2 red Gala apples, 2 cm piece fresh ginger
  • Then add the cider, vinegar, lemon juice, sugar, mixed spice and cinnamon stick. Stir well and bring to the boil
    350 ml apple cider, 75 ml white wine vinegar, ½ a lemon juiced, 250 g demerara sugar, 1 teaspoon mixed spice, 1 cinnamon stick
  • Simmer for 30 minutes, check and stir occasionally
  • After 30 minutes or so, the chutney should have started to thicken. Use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or pear. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  • Transfer the hot pear chutney to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.
  • If you plan to eat the chutney that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

Notes

Pears: This recipe uses conference pears but any variety of pear will work well in this chutney.
Apples: This recipe uses red eating apples, which keep their shape better than baking apples so results in a chunky textures chutney.
Vinegar: Use a vinegar with at least 5% acetic acid. This will ensure proper preserving of the chutney and prevent spoilage.
Demerara sugar: Sugar of course helps to sweeten the chutney but its also an important part of the preserving process, so don't leave it out.
Cider: Cider gives a fantastic flavour to this pear chutney, however if you'd prefer an alcohol free version just replace the cider with apple juice.
Mixed Spice: This is a ground spice mixture of cinnamon, coriander, caraway seeds, nutmeg, ginger and cloves. For a simple substitute use ½ teaspoon cinnamon and ½ teaspoon nutmeg.
What makes chutney a chutney? Chutney is usually fruits or vegetables preserved in vinegar and sugar.
Which vinegar is best for chutney? Any vinegar will work well in chutney as long as its contains at least 5% acetic acid, which will kill any bacteria and allow the chutney to be preserved without spoilage. The type of 5% vinegar you choose will be down to taste. For a lighter taste opt for white wine vinegar, for something stronger and sweeter choose an aged balsamic vinegar.
To test the consistency: Spoon some of the chutney onto a small plate and refrigerate for 5 minutes. If you are happy with the thickness of the cooled chutney you can remove the pan from the heat. If not, continue to simmer if too thin, or add more cider/apple juice if too thick.
Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.
How do you sterilise jars? To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.
How to seal the jars? Place hot pear chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How to store? You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of pear chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

Nutrition

Serving: 110ml jar | Calories: 200kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 7mg | Potassium: 248mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 39g | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Dec 2017. Updated in Jan 2022 with new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Pear Chutney appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/feed/ 16
Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/ https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/#comments Fri, 09 Dec 2016 18:18:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3045 A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top...

Read More

The post Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top tips for handling and sealing sterilised jars.

Featured ad for Marigold

fig and apple chutney with cheese

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Theres something so sophisticated and decadent about dotting cheese and biscuits with a good dollop of chutney. The best chutney is sweet and tangy all at the same time, which helps to cut through the strong cheese. Figs and balsamic lend themselves perfectly to this task. The seedy figs and dark vinegar also create a chutney with a stunning, deep purple colour and a slight crunch as you bite through it. Delicious.

Figs, by the way, also do exceedingly well in a sweet and sticky homemade fig jam. Or if you're after a different flavoured chutney try my spiced pear and cider chutney.

Fig, apple and balsamic chutney in a bowl

🍽 What equipment do I need?

I usually use the small (110ml/4oz) jars and this fig chutney recipe fills about 10 of these. If you have larger jars (225ml/8oz) this chutney recipe will fill around 6 of these.

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

Preparing the ingredients for the recipe is pretty straight forward. Its mainly a lot of chopping before everything is piled into one pan and simmered for around 30 minutes. To make 10 small jars or 6 large jars of fig chutney you will need the following:

  • 350g red onions chopped
  • 500g red apples cored and roughly chopped
  • 1 tbsp olive oil
  • 550g large figs stems removed and cut into eighths
  • 2 tsp mixed spice
  • 350g muscovado sugar
  • ½ tsp nutmeg
  • ½ tsp cinnamon
  • 150ml red wine vinegar (with acetic acid content of at least 5%)
  • 250ml balsamic vinegar (with acetic acid content of at least 5%)

Note: I usually leave the skin on the apples as its easier and quicker and means that theres still chunks of apple in the finished chutney. With the skin off the apple would break up and spread throughout the chutney. So it just depends on your taste and if you would prefer chunky chutney (skin on) or smoother chutney (skin off)

♨️ Sterilising jars

To sterilise my jars I usually wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). You can also put them through the dishwasher.

🔪 Instructions

To make the fig chutney:

  1. In a large pan heat the oil. Add the onions and gently cook until soft and slightly caramelised.chopping onions with a non slip board
  2. Next add the chopped apples and figs. Sprinkle over the sugar and stir together well to dissolve the sugar.Slicing figs
  3. Then add 2 teaspoon mixed spice, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, ½ teaspoon cinnamon, 150ml red wine vinegar and 250ml balsamic vinegar. Stir well.chopped figs and apples cooking in a large pan
  4. Bring everything the boil and then turn down the heat and simmer for 30-45 minutes. Check and stir occasionally.
  5. After 30 minutes or so use a masher to break up some of the large bits. Continue to simmer until you are happy with the consistency.

If serving immediately:

  1. Transfer to a bowl and chill if desired.

If storing in jars:

  1. Sterilise your clean jars either in the dishwasher or in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F.
  2. Transfer chutney into your jars whilst it is still hot and screw on the lids tightly (use a jam funnel for ease). A vacuum seal will form as the chutney cools. Tip: Use Marigold gloves to help when handling the hot jars and screwing on the lids.fig chutney in jars

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do I preserve fig and apple chutney?

As figs have a borderline acid pH, its advised to add acid to the jam - usually lemon juice. The acid helps to preserve the fruit correctly. In this case I've added vinegar instead. In terms of this particular recipe the 400ml of vinegar and 350g of sugar should be enough to preserve the chutney for at least 6 months. This is assuming that both vinegars have an acetic acid content of at least 5% and that the chutney is brought to boiling point during cooking and kept there for 30 minutes.

How do I seal the jars?

The chutney should also be transferred to sterilised jars (see above for sterilisation process) whilst it is still hot and jars should be sealed immediately. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How should chutney be stored?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. If it does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks.
This seal check and the sterilising of the jars in the oven should be enough to ensure the chutney stores well in the cupboard for 6 months. - Have a read of these preserving guidelines for more advice on storing chutneys/jams.
Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

💭 Top tips with Marigolds

  1. Surprisingly a Marigold glove can come in quite handy when you have a lot to chop. I tend to find that my chopping board wanders off or spins around when I'm chopping. However, pop a marigold glove under the board and problem solved.rubber glove under a chopping board to stop it slipping
  2. Marigolds are also particularly useful when it comes to handling and sealing hot jars. I usually sterilise my jars in a low oven and then transfer the hot chutney straight to the heated jars. The process of getting the chutney into the jar and getting the lids screwed on tight can be tricky when the jars and chutney are so hot. However, pop on a pair of Marigolds and your hands are automatically protected from the heat. In addition, the rubber glove provides extra grip so you can ensure the lids of the jars are screwed on super tight.using marigold gloves to tighten lids on chutney jars

Little homemade jars of chutney also make great Christmas presents - just add a cute label and ribbon and you're good to go. Even better - pair this gift up with a jar of my homemade Cranberry, Apple and Nutmeg sauce or my Spiced Pear and Cider Christmas Chutney 🙂

Other Christmas Recipes

📖 Recipe

Fig and apple chutney with cheese and biscuits
Print

📋 Fig and apple chutney with balsamic vinegar

A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top tip for handling and sealing sterilised jars.This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of chutney.
Course chutney, condiment, Dessert, sauces, side
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 110ml jars
Calories 47.1kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 350 g red onions chopped
  • 500 g red apples cored and roughly chopped
  • 550 g large figs stems removed and cut into eighths
  • 350 g muscovado sugar
  • 2 teaspoon mixed spice
  • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • 150 ml red wine vinegar with acetic acid content of at least 5%
  • 250 ml balsamic vinegar with acetic acid content of at least 5%

Instructions

To make the chutney:

  • In a large pan heat the oil. Add the onions and gently cook until soft and slightly caramelised.
    chopping onions with a non slip board
  • Next add the chopped apples and figs. Sprinkle over the sugar and stir together well to dissolve the sugar.
    Slicing figs
  • Then add 2 teaspoon mixed spice, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, ½ teaspoon cinnamon, 150ml red wine vinegar and 250ml balsamic vinegar. Stir well.
    chopped figs and apples cooking in a large pan
  • Bring everything the boil and then turn down the heat and simmer for 30-45 minutes. Check and stir occasionally.
  • After 30 minutes or so use a masher to break up some of the large bits. Continue to simmer until you are happy with the consistency.

If serving immediately:

  • Transfer to a bowl and chill if desired.

If storing in jars:

  • Sterilise your clean jars either in the dishwasher or in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F.
    fig chutney in jars
  • Transfer chutney into your jars whilst it is still hot and screw on the lids tightly (use a jam funnel for ease). A vacuum seal will form as the chutney cools. Tip: Use Marigold gloves to help when handling the hot jars and screwing on the lids.
    using marigold gloves to tighten lids on chutney jars

Notes

Jars: I usually use the small (110ml/4oz) jars and this recipe fills about 10 of those. If you have larger jars (225ml/8oz) it will probably fill around 6 of these.
Should I peel the apples?: I usually leave the skin on the apples as its easier and quicker, adds more flavour and means that theres still chunks of apple in the finished chutney. With the skin off the apple would break up and spread throughout the chutney – so just depends on your taste and if you would prefer chunky chutney (skin on) or smoother chutney (skin off).
How do I preserve my chutney?: In this recipe the 350g of sugar and 400ml of vinegar will preserve the chutney. Make sure that you use vinegars with at least 5% acetic acid content and bring the chutney to the boil and keep there for at least 30 minutes for this to be effective.
How do I sterilise my jars?: To sterilise the jars I usually wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). You can also put them through the dishwasher.
How do I seal the jars?: Place hot chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How is should chutney be stored?: You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.
Marigold tips: Use a marigold glove under your chopping bard to keep it steady. Put on a pair of marigolds to protect your hands when handling hot jars and to get a better grip when screwing on the lids.
nutritional info fig and apple chutney

Nutrition

Serving: 45g | Calories: 47.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 10.9g | Vitamin A: 3.6IU | Vitamin C: 1.1mg | Calcium: 14.6mg | Iron: 0.2mg

Please note that the above post contains affiliate links, which means if you click these links and then go on to purchase the products, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay.  I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

The post Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/feed/ 27
Sloe Gin Hot Toddy with Blackberries https://properfoodie.com/blackberry-sloe-gin-hot-toddy/ https://properfoodie.com/blackberry-sloe-gin-hot-toddy/#respond Mon, 11 Jan 2021 17:45:55 +0000 http://www.properfoodie.com/?p=7871 SLOE GIN HOT TODDY RECIPE. AD FEATURE FOR SILVER MUSHROOM. A warming sloe gin hot toddy recipe flavoured with sweet blackberry juice, honey and aromatic sprigs of fresh rosemary. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Who has the time or inclination for figuring out complicated cocktails?? This easy sloe gin hot toddy recipe has just enough...

Read More

The post Sloe Gin Hot Toddy with Blackberries appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

SLOE GIN HOT TODDY RECIPE. AD FEATURE FOR SILVER MUSHROOM.

A warming sloe gin hot toddy recipe flavoured with sweet blackberry juice, honey and aromatic sprigs of fresh rosemary.

a purple and steaming, double walled glass of sloe gin hot toddy decorated with a sprig of rosemary and a second glass in the background.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Who has the time or inclination for figuring out complicated cocktails?? This easy sloe gin hot toddy recipe has just enough about it to make it interesting but theres not so much going on that you need a million ingredients. Its also a really easy to put together, so once you've made it, its probably a recipe that will stick - no need to keep looking up the method!!

However, if you are after a hot toddy that will help with a cough or a cold then you might be better trying this Honey and lemon tea.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making this recipe:

🥘 Ingredients

To make this sloe gin hot toddy you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make the sloe gin hot toddy recipe with text overlay stating each ingredients

Ingredient notes

Sloe gin: As this is a hot beverage I find that sloe gin works best here. A bit like with hot Vimto, the flavour of berries is greatly enhanced when heated. However, if you would like a more traditional hot toddy you can replace the sloe gin with brandy or whiskey. If doing this I recommend removing the blackberries and rosemary and mixing with lemon juice and cinnamon instead.

Honey: Honey is essential for balancing out the flavour and is also a lovely addition to any hot drink for its soothing effects.

Blackberries: Blackberries are a great way to add to the natural berry flavour of the drink. You could also try with raspberries, blueberries, or blackcurrants. I do not recommend using sloe berries as they are far too tart to eat raw.

Rosemary: Purely for aromatic flavour.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the blackberries in a small bowl. Add a splash of hot water and then use a fork to crush and mash up the berries.
  2. Push the berries through a sieve allowing the juice to fall into a clean jug. Use the back of a spoon to push through as much juice as you can. - Discard seeds.
  3. Add 2 teaspoon honey to the blackberry juice and mix well.
  4. Divide the sweetened blackberry juice between 2 tall mugs or double walled glasses and add a measure of sloe gin to each glass.A collage of 4 images showing how to sloe gin hot toddy step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Top up each glass with hot water and stir well until the honey fully dissolves. Taste and add more honey if desired.
  6. Decorate each glass with sprigs of rosemary and extra whole blackberries (optional).A collage of 2 images showing how to make sloe gin hot toddy step by step for instructions 5 and 6

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra flavour add spices such as cinnamon, cloves and star anise.
  • To enhance the flavour of rosemary add a few rosemary leaves to the hot water and blackberries in step 1 of the recipe. Then leave to stand and infuse for a few minutes before removing the rosemary and crushing the blackberries with a fork.
  • Substitutions: If you can't get hold of any fresh blackberries you could replace with blackcurrants, strawberries, blueberries or a blackcurrant or blackberry cordial.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can I use other types of gin in this recipe?

You can of course opt for other flavours of gin if you prefer. Try to go for flavours that will pair well with blackberries.

Can I use brandy or whiskey in this hot toddy recipe?

If you are looking for a brandy of whiskey hot toddy then remove the rosemary and berries from this recipe and use lemon juice and cinnamon instead. Taste and add more honey if desired.

Two double wall tall glass filled with purple berry hot toddy and decorated with sprigs of rosemary.

☕ Other hot drink recipes

🍓 Other recipes that use berries

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

purple and steaming sloe gin hot toddy served in 2 double wall glasses, with sprigs of rosemary and on a bronze tray.
Print

Sloe Gin Hot Toddy with Blackberries

A warming sloe gin hot toddy recipe flavoured with sweet blackberry juice, honey and aromatic sprigs of fresh rosemary.
Course aperitif, aperitivo, beverage, digestif
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 tall glasses
Calories 96kcal

Ingredients

  • 80 g Fresh Blackberries
  • Splash of Hot water
  • 2 teaspoon Honey
  • 2 measures of Sloe Gin
  • Hot water to top up
  • Sprigs of rosemary and extra whole blackberries to serve optional

Instructions

  • Place the blackberries in a small bowl. Add a splash of hot water and then use a fork to crush and mash up the berries.
  • Push the berries through a sieve allowing the juice to fall into a clean jug. Use the back of a spoon to push through as much juice as you can. - Discard seeds.
  • Add 2 teaspoon honey to the blackberry juice and mix well.
  • Divide the sweetened blackberry juice between 2 tall mugs or double walled glasses and add a measure of sloe gin to each glass.
  • Top up each glass with hot water and stir well until the honey fully dissolves. Taste and add more honey if desired.
  • Decorate each glass with sprigs of rosemary and extra whole blackberries (optional).

Notes

Flavour: For extra flavour add spices such as cinnamon, cloves and star anise.
Rosemary: To enhance the flavour of rosemary add a few rosemary leaves to the hot water and blackberries in step 1 of the recipe. Then leave to stand and infuse for a few minutes before removing the rosemary and crushing the blackberries with a fork.
Substitutions: If you can't get hold of any fresh blackberries you could replace with blackcurrants, strawberries, blueberries or a blackcurrant or blackberry cordial.
Can I use other types of gin in this hot toddy recipe?
You can of course opt for other flavours of gin if you prefer. Try to go for flavours that will pair well with blackberries.
Can I use brandy or whiskey in this hot toddy recipe?
If you are looking for a brandy of whiskey hot toddy then remove the rosemary and berries from this recipe and use lemon juice and cinnamon instead. Taste and add more honey if desired.

Nutrition

Serving: 300ml | Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 65mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 86IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in November 2018. Updated in January 2021 with new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Sloe Gin Hot Toddy with Blackberries appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/blackberry-sloe-gin-hot-toddy/feed/ 0
Christmas honey glazed carrots and parsnips with Garlic and Thyme https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-carrots-parsnips/ https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-carrots-parsnips/#comments Sun, 24 Dec 2017 13:12:58 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5603 Delicious honey glazed carrots and parsnips with crushed garlic cloves and fresh thyme. This dish of little carrots and parsnips will be a real crowd-pleaser on your Christmas table this year. Christmas dinner sides Its Christmas Eve!! And theres just enough time for me to pop up one more recipe before I start on my...

Read More

The post Christmas honey glazed carrots and parsnips with Garlic and Thyme appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Delicious honey glazed carrots and parsnips with crushed garlic cloves and fresh thyme. This dish of little carrots and parsnips will be a real crowd-pleaser on your Christmas table this year.

honey glazed carrots and parsnips

Christmas dinner sides

Its Christmas Eve!! And theres just enough time for me to pop up one more recipe before I start on my own Christmas prep for tomorrow. Getting organised with all the side dishes is a great way to be able to concentrate on the star of the show on the actual day. Not only are these honey glazed carrots and parsnips super tasty and really pretty but they also really easy to make and can be prepared ahead of the big day.

Christmas carrots and parsnips honey roast root vegetables

Honey glazed carrots and parsnips

So along with my gorgonzola sprouts and a delicious Tia Maria Tiramisu dessert I'm also going to be preparing some honey glazed carrots and parnsips a day in advance. I love little baby carrots with a little tuft of green left on the end, however, standard carrots sliced into skinny batons will work just as well for this recipe.

garlic and thyme honey roast carrots and parsnips

Preparing root vegetables in advance

And this recipe really couldn't be any simpler - and it really will take away any hassle on the day and save on extra pots and pans to wash. The baby carrots need no special prep, they can go straight on tray along with a few sprigs of thyme and a couple of crushed garlic cloves. I used standard parsnips to go along with my carrots, which I roughly chopped into similar shapes and sizes as the baby carrots.

garlic and thyme carrots and parsnips

Once all the veggies are lined up - drizzle over a table spoon of honey, a table spoon of oil, a sprinkle of salt and pepper and then add a few dots of proper butter. Pop the whole lot into the oven and roast for 20 minutes. Easy!! Once cooked these can be transferred to a sealable container and refrigerated for up to 2 days.

honey roast carrots and parsnips prepared in advance

On the big day place your honey glazed carrots and parsnips back on a baking tray and reheat in the oven for 5 minutes - done and dusted 🙂 For more great Christmas Day prep ideas, check out my homemade cauliflower cheese, homemade Cranberry sauce and Honey glazed prawns starter. Or if you don't feel the need to roast a whole turkey try out my simple roast chicken recipe. And once Christmas is all over with don't forget to make good use of that leftover turkey with a Turkey sunshine risotto or Mulligatawny soup.

If you also happen to be stuck for ideas for your Christmas shopping, then check out my Christmas gifts for foodies - jam packed full of present ideas for the food lovers in your life.

Other Christmas recipe ideas

📖 Recipe

christmas carrots and parsnips
Print

Christmas honey roast root vegetables with Garlic and Thyme

Deliciously glazed honey roast root vegetables with crushed garlic cloves and fresh thyme. This dish of little carrots and parsnips will be a real crowd-pleaser on your Christmas table this year.
Course Christmas, Side Dish
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 People

Ingredients

  • 150 g baby carrots
  • 200 g parsnips
  • 3 whole crushed garlic cloves
  • A few sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • tablespoon of runny honey
  • 10 g butter
  • Salt and pepper

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees.
  • The baby carrots need no prep - place these straight onto a large baking tray. If you are using standard carrots then peel, remove the ends and chop into skinny batons. Place onto the tray.
  • To prepare the parsnips wash them thoroughly then remove the ends and chop into a similar size and shape as the carrots. Spread the parsnips evenly amongst the carrots.
  • Next peel 3 garlic cloves and gently crush each one by placing the flat side off the knife over the top of the clove and gently pushing on top with the palm of your hand. Add the cloves to the tray along with the sprigs of fresh thyme.
  • Drizzle the whole lot with olive oil and honey then roughly chop the butter into small cubes and dot around the tray. Finish with a pinch of salt and pepper.
  • Place the tray in the centre of the oven and roast for 20 minutes.
  • Once cooked remove from the oven and serve. If you are preparing in advance then allow the veggies to cool before transferring to a sealable container, then refrigerate for up to 2 days.
  • To reheat place the vegetables back onto a tray and bake in a 180 degree oven for 5 minutes.

PIN FOR LATER

Honey glazed carrots and parsnip root vegetables with garlic and thyme

The post Christmas honey glazed carrots and parsnips with Garlic and Thyme appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-carrots-parsnips/feed/ 2
Leftover Turkey Risotto https://properfoodie.com/leftover-turkey-risotto/ https://properfoodie.com/leftover-turkey-risotto/#comments Wed, 13 Dec 2017 00:01:01 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5478 Golden saffron rice, aniseedy tarragon and shredded leftover turkey, combined with white wine and stock to create this sunny winter dish Leftover Turkey Hands up who loves leftover turkey in-between Christmas Day and the New Year!!?? Me!! For Sure!! Loaded on a white bread roll with plenty of butter, a good spoonful of stuffing and...

Read More

The post Leftover Turkey Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Golden saffron rice, aniseedy tarragon and shredded leftover turkey, combined with white wine and stock to create this sunny winter dish

turkey sunshine risotto

Leftover Turkey

Hands up who loves leftover turkey in-between Christmas Day and the New Year!!??

Me!! For Sure!! Loaded on a white bread roll with plenty of butter, a good spoonful of stuffing and maybe a dollop of my homemade cranberry sauce - if theres any left!! However, theres only so many turkey sandwiches one can consume over Christmas - although thats still probably quite a fair amount.

Anyway - I think its a fabulous thing if theres enough turkey leftover to create a completely brand new dish. Previous years, my favourite has always been Mulligatawny (swap the chicken for turkey in the recipe linked here). But this year Ive been testing out a new dish. Turkey Sunshine risotto!

sunshine risotto

And I do think this could be just the thing to make me smile after all the festivities are over and everything starts to go back to normal.

Saffron

So of course the magical ingredient in this recipe is that oh so bright and oh so precious saffron. What an amazing little addition saffron can be. To be honest I do very little cooking with saffron, and I probably wouldn't have thought to do this recipe, had I not come across a little saffron stall when we were on our honeymoon in Italy.

leftover turkey and saffron risotto

I've been storing away my Italian saffron in the cupboard ever since we returned home in September, just waiting for the perfect opportunity to use it in a ideal recipe. After all I don't want to be too frivolous with such a highly valued and hard worked for spice. Is spice the right word? . . .

Googled it (obviously)! and apparently I can refer to it as a spice. As quoted by wikipedia: 'Saffron (pronounced /ˈsæfrən/ or /ˈsæfrɒn/) is a spice derived from the flower of Crocus sativus, commonly known as the "saffron crocus".'

So there we go.

turkey tarragon and saffron risotto

Anyway . . . A lovely Christmas leftovers dish, when the nights are at their longest, seems like the perfect time to get out this sunny spice and bring a bit of colour back into our lives.

My only tip for cooking with saffron is to soak it first - usually in a liquid that will also be added to the recipe. This helps to really bring out the yellow when cooking. In this instance I soaked my saffron in white wine for a few minutes before adding to the pan.

As this is a recipe to make over the Christmas period its important that its quick and simple. So to save time and energy this recipe adds all the stock in one go and then cooks the risotto by baking in the oven for 20 minutes. No tedious additions of liquid and constant stirring. Pop the lid on and let the oven do all the hard work.

Leftover Turkey Sunshine Risotto

So if you reckon you'll have some leftover turkey this year and you fancy a sunny kinda dish, be sure to give this a go 🙂

Other risotto recipes you might like to try: Haddock and rosemary risotto, Mushroom risotto, Amarone risotto.

📖 Recipe

turkey sunshine risotto
Print

Leftover Turkey Sunshine Risotto

Golden saffron rice, aniseedy tarragon and shredded leftover turkey, combined with white wine and stock to create this sunny winter dish
Course Christmas, Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine Christmas, Italian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 627kcal

Ingredients

  • Pinch of Saffron
  • 200 ml White wine
  • 10 g Butter
  • 100 g Shallots finely chopped
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped
  • 125 g Celery finely chopped
  • 80 g Kale roughly chopped
  • 175 g Risotto rice
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 280 g leftover Turkey
  • 400 ml Stock
  • Handful 5g fresh Tarragon leaves

To serve:

  • Top with extra tarragon leaves and a few extra strands of saffron

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 180 degrees Fan.
  • First prepare the saffron by adding it to the 200ml of white wine and leaving to soak for a few minutes.
  • In a large ovenproof dish, add the butter and melt on a medium heat. Next add the shallots, garlic and celery then fry gently for 2-3 minutes or until soft.
  • Next add the kale and continue to cook until it begins to wilt slightly.
  • Add the rice and mix well before pouring in the wine and saffron.
  • Simmer on a medium heat until the wine is completely soaked up by the rice and then add the mustard, leftover turkey and the stock.
  • Mix well, pop on the lid and bake in the oven for 20 minutes.
  • After 20 minutes remove from the oven and taste to check the rice is cooked through. If its still a little hard top up with a little water and return to the oven for a further 5 minutes.
  • When fully cooked through, stir in a handful of fresh tarragon leaves and serve.
  • Top with extra tarragon and a few extra strands of saffron if desired

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 690g | Calories: 627kcal | Carbohydrates: 82.9g | Protein: 47g | Fat: 7.1g | Saturated Fat: 3.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1.8g | Fiber: 3.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Leftover Turkey Sunshine Risotto

I am linking this recipe to #cookblogshare hosted by hijackedbytwins, recipesmadeeasyeverydayhealthyrecipes and Easypeasyfoodie. I am also linking to #brilliantblogposts by honestmum, #recipeoftheweek hosted by amummytoo, #whatsfordinner? hosted by TheLazyGastronome, and #CookOnceEatTwice hosted by seachingforspice,

The Lazy Gastronome
Hijacked By Twins
Brilliant blog posts on HonestMum.com
Link up your recipe of the week

The post Leftover Turkey Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/leftover-turkey-risotto/feed/ 4
Honey and Lemon Tea https://properfoodie.com/warm-water-with-lemon-and-honey/ https://properfoodie.com/warm-water-with-lemon-and-honey/#respond Fri, 08 Jan 2021 16:40:36 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8251 HONEY AND LEMON TEA RECIPE. AD FEATURE FOR SILVER MUSHROOM. Steamy honey and lemon tea with sliced lemon and fresh thyme. Make this rejuvenating hot toddy in just 10 minutes to give you a boost during those cold winter days. Arguably one of the best remedies for a cold, filled with plenty of vitamins and a...

Read More

The post Honey and Lemon Tea appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

HONEY AND LEMON TEA RECIPE. AD FEATURE FOR SILVER MUSHROOM.

Steamy honey and lemon tea with sliced lemon and fresh thyme. Make this rejuvenating hot toddy in just 10 minutes to give you a boost during those cold winter days. Arguably one of the best remedies for a cold, filled with plenty of vitamins and a nice boost of sugar. Especially good when infused with some fragrant thyme and a tiny pinch of salt.

Honey and lemon tea in a glass tea cup viewed from above.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

The festive period is rife with alcohol. Every trip, every special day, every visit to a friends house.... it can very quickly get out of hand. With this in mind its always nice to have an alternative non alcoholic option or a soothing recovery drink.

Honey and lemon tea is a great option for a virgin hot toddy. Its also sweetened with natural sugar, provides a tangy boost of vitamin C from the lemon juice and is full of goodness from all the health benefits of honey. I also like to add in the juice from oranges and limes, the more citrusy the better! And of course its great to have a healthy boost of vitamins and other essential nutrients.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making this recipe:

🥘 Ingredients

To make this virgin hot toddy you will need:

A display of all the ingredients needed to make honey and lemon tea with text overlay labelling each ingredient.

Ingredient notes

Juices: Lemon juice is the main ingredients required for the recipe. Orange juice brings sweetness and lime juice brings sour so you can flavour to your taste.

Honey: Honey is essential for balancing out the sour lemon flavour and is the main medicinal agent bringing its soothing effects.

Salt: Only the tiniest pinch of salt is needed in this drink. Its only really necessary if you are feeling particularly rough, run down and in need of a sodium boost. If not you may prefer to leave this out.

Thyme: Purely for aromatic flavour.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. In a tea cup or mug add the 3 juices and stir in a tablespoon of honey.
  2. Next add the sliced lemon, lime and orange and sprinkle in a tiny pinch of salt and some fresh thyme.
  3. Top up with hot water.
  4. Stir well to fully dissolve the honey and salt. Four images showing how to make Honey tea in stages.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Does honey and warm water with lemon cure a cold?

Although this lovely beverage can be helpful to soothe a sore throat or loosen congestion, it unfortunately isn't a magic remedy and probably won't release you from the relinquishing grips of a nasty cold. However, the NHS does now recommend warm water with lemon and honey to treat coughs, rather than over the counter cough medicine!! Very useful to know!!

Does lemon and warm water aid weight loss?

Drinking warm water is a great way to keep warm in the winter and stave off hunger pangs. So although not directly related to weight loss, this lovely beverage may aid you in a weight loss journey, by keeping you fuller for longer and ensuring your digestive system has had plenty of time to digest the previous meal before you eat again.

What are the benefits of drinking honey and lemon tea?

The combination of lemon and honey is particularly good for easing the symptoms of a cold. The lemon can help loosen congestion and honey can soothe a sore throat. This citrus tea will also provide a nice boost of vitamin C to help the immune system. In addition good quality honey contains antioxidants which have been linked to reducing the risks of strokes, heart disease and some cancers.

Steamy cup of lemon tea in a glass teacup sat on a bronze mottled tray.

☕ Other hot drink recipes

🍋 Other recipes that use lemon

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Honey and lemon tea in a glass tea cup viewed from above.
Print

Honey And Lemon Tea

Steamy honey and lemon tea with sliced lemon and fresh thyme. Make this rejuvenating hot toddy in just 10 minutes to give you a boost during those cold winter days. Arguably one of the best remedies for a cold, filled with plenty of vitamins and a nice boost of sugar. Especially good when diffused with some fragrant thyme and a tiny pinch of salt.
Course beverage
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 1 cup or mug
Calories 75kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ a large orange juiced
  • Squeeze of lime juice
  • ½ a lemon juiced
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • Tiny pinch of sea salt
  • Slices of lemon lime and orange
  • Few sprigs of fresh thyme leaves
  • Hot water to top up

Instructions

  • In a tea cup or mug add the 3 juices and stir in a tablespoon of honey.
  • Next add the sliced lemon, lime and orange and sprinkle in a tiny pinch of salt and some fresh thyme.
  • Top up with hot water.
  • Stir well to fully dissolve the honey and salt.

Notes

Ingredient notes:
Juices: Lemon juice is the main ingredients required for the recipe. Orange and lime are optional. Orange juice brings sweetness and lime juice brings sour so you can flavour to your taste.
Honey: Honey is essential for balancing out the sour lemon flavour and is the main medicinal agent bringing its soothing effects.
Salt: Only the tiniest pinch of salt is needed in this drink. Its only really necessary if you are feeling particularly rough, run down and in need of a sodium boost. If not you may prefer to leave this out.
Thyme: Purely for aromatic flavour.
Does honey and warm water with lemon cure a cold?
Although this lovely beverage can be helpful to soothe a sore throat and loosen congestion, it unfortunately isn't a magic remedy and probably won't release you from the relinquishing grips of a nasty cold. However, the NHS does now recommend warm water with lemon and honey to treat coughs, rather than over the counter cough medicine!! Very useful to know!!
What are the benefits of drinking honey and lemon tea?
The combination of lemon and honey is particularly good if you have a cold. The lemon can help loosen congestion and honey can soothe a sore throat. This citrus tea will also provide a nice boost of vitamin C to help the immune system. In addition good quality honey contains antioxidants which have been linked to reducing the risks of strokes, heart disease and some cancers.

Nutrition

Serving: 250ml | Calories: 75kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 205mg | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin C: 14mg

This post was first published in December 2018. Updated in January 2021 with an improved recipe and new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Honey and Lemon Tea appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/warm-water-with-lemon-and-honey/feed/ 0
Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs https://properfoodie.com/kedgeree-with-poached-eggs/ https://properfoodie.com/kedgeree-with-poached-eggs/#comments Wed, 17 Feb 2016 08:31:57 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1680 A beautiful kedgeree rice dish full of the flavours of cardamom and curry served with bright pink pieces of salmon and a runny poached egg. A few weekends ago myself and a few friends had a night away in London in celebration of a 30th birthday. That's right.... this is the year that me and...

Read More

The post Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A beautiful kedgeree rice dish full of the flavours of cardamom and curry served with bright pink pieces of salmon and a runny poached egg.

Kedgeree in the pan

A few weekends ago myself and a few friends had a night away in London in celebration of a 30th birthday. That's right.... this is the year that me and most of my friends turn 30! This does seem slightly ridiculous, as we can't all possibly be that grown up, but some how - it's all true. However, it does mean that there's lots of celebrating to be done and the first celebration kicked off in London. It was only a quick trip with one night away, but whilst we were there we managed to squeeze in 3 amazing restaurants: The Fish market for lunch, The Shard for a fancy evening meal and Muriel's Kitchen for a detox smoothie and recovery breakfast.

The Fish Market is where the inspiration for this recipe came from. I had a huge mountain of mussels to start in a wonderful creamy white wine sauce with just a hint of chilli. Followed by a wonderfully warming salmon kedgeree, which was just what I needed after the 2 hour train journey and brisk walk in the cool London air.

So once I was back home, I set out to come up with my own take on this vibrant dish. The great thing about kedgeree is that it's really not that difficult and everything can be thrown into one pan. Okay, so the fish needs to be cooked separately and the eggs need to be poached, but these are minor yet tasty details that are well worth the extra effort.

Once the salmon is cooked and in the pot the dish really starts to come together. The plump pink salmon flakes against the bright yellow spiced rice is a match made in fish dish heaven. If you can get a runny yolk as well, then you're definitely in for a treat.

For more healthy breakfast inspiration have a look at my healthy banana bread, breakfast loaf with sultanas, summer porridge bowl, healthy breakfast on the go, Bircher muesli with stewed apples, Orange summer smoothieSalmon kedgeree with boiled eggs, Matcha granola and blueberry yogurt pot, and Full English breakfast bowl.

📖 Recipe

Print

Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs

A beautiful kedgeree rice dish full of the flavours of cardamom and curry served with bright pink pieces of salmon and a runny poached egg
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon Rapeseed/olive oil
  • 2 Salmon fillets
  • 125 g long grain rice
  • 1 red onion diced
  • 5 spring onions roughly chopped
  • 1 garlic clove finely chopped
  • 2 cm piece of fresh ginger finely chopped
  • 100 ml white wine
  • 3 cardamom pods crushed
  • ½ teaspoon onion seeds
  • ½ teaspoon turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon garam masala
  • 500 ml veg stock
  • 1 red chilli finely chopped
  • juice of 1 lemon
  • 1 tin broad beans
  • Handful fresh parsley chopped
  • Handful fresh coriander chopped
  • 2 eggs

Instructions

  • First, heat the oven to 180 degrees C. Place the salmon fillets in the centre of a piece of foil, drizzle with oil and season. Loosely wrap the foil around the fish and bake in the oven for 15-20 minutes.?Next heat up a tablespoon of oil in a wok or large frying pan. Add the red onion and gently cook for 2 minutes.
  • Once the onion has started to soften pour in the uncooked rice and stir well to coat each grain with the oil. Whilst continuing to stir add the garlic, ginger, cardamom pods, turmeric, garam masala and onion seeds. Stir well to ensure the rice is coated with the spices. Add the white wine to the pan and bring to the boil, allowing the wine to soak into the rice. Once the wine has reduced by at least half, pour in the stock, add the spring onions, bring to a simmer and cover with a lid.
  • Leave to cook for around 10 minutes, checking and stirring occasionally.
  • While the rice is cooking, boil a small pan of water then bring to a simmer and poach the 2 eggs by cracking directly into the water. Poach for around 3-4 minutes then plunge into a bowl of cold water to stop the cooking process. When ready to serve place the eggs back into boiling water for 30 seconds in order to reheat.
  • If you prefer the eggs can be boiled in the shell for around 6 minutes, then peeled and sliced into quarters.
  • After the rice has been simmering for 10 minutes, check it is cooked then remove the lid and add the broad beans, red chilli and lemon juice. Stir well and cook with the lid off for a further 2 minutes.?Flake the cooked salmon and remove the pan from the heat. Add the salmon to the rice along with the parsley and coriander. Stir gently then serve up along with the eggs.

The post Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/kedgeree-with-poached-eggs/feed/ 2
Cranberry Sauce Recipe https://properfoodie.com/cranberry-sauce-apple-nutmeg/ https://properfoodie.com/cranberry-sauce-apple-nutmeg/#comments Sun, 02 Jan 2022 20:24:17 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2995 Homemade cranberry sauce recipe full of fresh juicy berries and flavoured with spicy nutmeg. A great homemade Christmas gift and the perfect condiment for Christmas day dinner. A simple and delicious sauce that only takes 45 minutes to make and jar up. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Not only is the best sauce to serve...

Read More

The post Cranberry Sauce Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade cranberry sauce recipe full of fresh juicy berries and flavoured with spicy nutmeg. A great homemade Christmas gift and the perfect condiment for Christmas day dinner. A simple and delicious sauce that only takes 45 minutes to make and jar up.

Homemade cranberry sauce in a small jar with a teaspoonful of sauce at the side with larger jar in background.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Not only is the best sauce to serve up on Christmas Day but it also makes for a pretty good Christmas present. With little jars at the ready and a few tags this easy homemade cranberry sauce recipe can quickly be turned into a great homemade foodie gift.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of sauce. To make homemade cranberry sauce you will need:

cranberry and apple sauce christmas present

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Cranberries: Use fresh cranberries

Muscavado sugar: Muscovado sugar is a coarse, unrefined, dark brown sugar. It contains natural molasses and has a toffee-like taste, which balances out the tart cranberries. The next best alternative is dark brown sugar. However, this has less molasses and so a milder taste.

Apples: Use baking apples, which cook down into a smooth puree and so are the best option for a sauce.

Ground nutmeg: This is optional but I like to add this for a hint of festive spice.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Peel and chop the apples and squeeze the juice out of half an orange.
  2. Place all the ingredients in one large pan, mix well and put on the hob on a medium heat.
  3. Bring to the boil then allow to simmer gently.
  4. Simmer for 30 minutes or until apples are soft and cranberries have burst.Four step by step images showing how to make cranberry sauce for steps 1-4.
  5. After 30 minutes use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or un-burst berries. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  6. Transfer the hot cranberry sauce to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.Two step by step images showing how to make cranberry sauce for steps 5-6.
  7. If you plan to eat the sauce that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

💭 Expert tips

  • Consistency: Cranberry sauce should have a jam like consistency. The sauce will thicken and become jam like as the cranberries are heated and release pectin. Be aware that as the sauce cools it will become thicker. Therefore, stop heating the sauce when it is still slightly thinner than you would like.
  • Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you sterilise jars?

To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.

How to seal the jars?

Place hot cranberry sauce in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the sauce cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How to store?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of cranberry sauce can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

Is cranberry sauce meant to be sweet or sour?

Cranberry sauce is a balance between sweet from the sugar and tart from the cranberries. Tartness can be reduced by the addition of sweet juices such as apple or orange juice.

Small jar filled with homemade cranberry sauce with a spoonful of sauce at the side.

Other Christmas recipe ideas

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Homemade cranberry sauce in a small jar with a teaspoonful of sauce at the side with larger jar in background.
Print

Cranberry Sauce Recipe

Homemade cranberry sauce recipe full of fresh juicy berries and flavoured with spicy nutmeg. A great homemade Christmas gift and the perfect condiment for Christmas day dinner. A simple and delicious sauce that only takes 45 minutes to make and jar up.
Course condiment, Side Dish
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 10 Small jars
Calories 203kcal

Equipment

  • Masher
  • Jam funnel and jam jars (if jarring)

Ingredients

  • 600 g cranberries
  • 400 g baking apples cored peeled and chopped

  • 400 g light brown muscavado sugar
  • Juice from ½ an orange
  • 250 ml water
  • 1 ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg

Instructions

  • Peel and chop the apples and squeeze the juice out of half an orange.
    400 g baking apples, Juice from ½ an orange
  • Place all the ingredients in one large pan, mix well and put on the hob on a medium heat.
    600 g cranberries, 400 g baking apples, 400 g light brown muscavado sugar, Juice from ½ an orange, 250 ml water, 1 ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • Bring to the boil then allow to simmer gently.
  • Simmer for 30 minutes or until apples are soft and cranberries have burst.
  • After 30 minutes use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or un-burst berries. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  • Transfer the hot cranberry sauce to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.
  • If you plan to eat the sauce that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

Notes

Cranberries: Use fresh cranberries.
Muscavado sugar: Muscovado sugar is a coarse, unrefined, dark brown sugar. It contains natural molasses and has a toffee-like taste, which balances out the tart cranberries. The next best alternative is dark brown sugar. However, this has less molasses and so a milder taste.
Apples: Use baking apples, which cook down into a smooth puree and so are the best option for a sauce.
Ground nutmeg: This is optional but I like to add this for a hint of festive spice.
Consistency: Cranberry sauce should have a jam like consistency. The sauce will thicken and become jam like as the cranberries are heated and release pectin. Be aware that as the sauce cools it will become thicker. Therefore, stop heating the sauce when it is still slightly thinner than you would like.
Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.
How do you sterilise jars? To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.
How to seal the jars? Place hot cranberry sauce in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the sauce cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How to store? You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of cranberry sauce can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.
Is cranberry sauce meant to be sweet or sour? Cranberry sauce is a balance between sweet from the sugar and tart from the cranberries. Tartness can be reduced by the addition of sweet juices such as apple or orange juice.

Nutrition

Serving: 30g | Calories: 203kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 152mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 62IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Dec 2016. Updated in Dec 2021 with new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

This post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

Cranberry, apple and nutmeg sauce a great homemade Christmas present and perfect condiment to Christmas dinner

 

The post Cranberry Sauce Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cranberry-sauce-apple-nutmeg/feed/ 2